FENCING RULES
1995 Edition United States Fencing Association, Inc. © United States Fencing Association, Inc. 1995 FOREWORD This American version of the international rules governing fencing competitions is translated and adapted from the 1994 French edition published by the FIE and incorporates changes made by the FIE Congresses through 1995. Unless otherwise noted here or in the USFA Operations Manual, these rules apply to fencing competitions in the United States. Two appendices are included with this 1995 edition: Appendix A – The Fencer’s Publicity Code is part of the FIE Rules for Competitions. Appendix B – The FIE has published a number of “Temporary Provisions” concerning competition formats and certain other rules. The complete, updated text is included in Appendix B; notes are also located in the text in appropriate locations. The USFA, Inc. (founded as the Amateur Fencers League of America in 1891) is a not-for-profit, tax-exempt organization primarily engaged in increasing participation in the sport of fencing. Membership in the USFA, in an appropriate category, is open to anyone who has an interest in fencing. The USFA is the official governing body for amateur fencing activities in the United States, and is so recognized by the United States Olympic Committee and the International Fencing Federation (FIE). Accordingly, the authority to enact, amend, and repeal the rules governing amateur fencing in the United States rests solely with the Board of Directors of the USFA. As a matter of policy, the USFA normally follows the technical rules enacted for the sport by the FIE, with occasional minor exceptions that are duly announced. The rules for fencing, as set forth in this book, therefore apply to all USFA championships and nationally-rated competitions, and, unless exceptions have been announced in advance by the appropriate authorities, apply also to all events scheduled by any Section or Division of the USFA, or held under USFA auspices. United States Fencing Association, Inc. One Olympic Plaza Colorado Springs, CO 80909-5774 TEL: 719/578-4511 FAX: 719/632-5737 E-mail: [email protected] World Wide Web: http://www.usfa.org
PREFACE This American edition incorporates the most recent FIE rules changes, using terms commonly used in American fencing. Some changes of form have been made to increase the clarity of the text, without altering the original intent. The Table of Contents and Index have been extensively revised in an attempt to improve their usefulness. The ongoing publication of an American version of the FIE Rules has been carried out under the auspices of the USFA Fencing Officials Commission. Our British and Canadian counterparts have been consulted regarding translations from the French text. A number of USFA members have been involved in the publication of this book. I would like to offer special thanks to Mary Frye for her assistance in updating the sample DE tables (in case anyone is wondering, there are no characters from Star Trek: Voyager because they couldn’t be seeded into the table – they’re always in the wrong quadrant). For those interested in such things: The text has been through many electronic incarnations and now exists in IBM PC format. Editing and formatting are currently performed using Adobe PageMakerTM 5.0, Microsoft WordTM 7.0, Microsoft ExcelTM 7.0, CorelDRAW!TM 6.0, and Corel PHOTO-PAINTTM 6.0. Ann McBain Ezzell, Editor Bloomfield Hills, Michigan April 1996
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – i ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THE TEXT Cf. (followed by a number) = see article number f. (after a number) = and the following article ff (after a number) = and the following articles Please note the difference between “327f.” - Articles 327 and 328 and “327f” - section (f) of Article 327
NUMBERING OF ARTICLES The articles are numbered without continuity from one part to the next. The number of each part of the Rules corresponds to the first digit of each article it contains. Part I GENERAL RULES begins at Article 1. Part II FOIL begins at Article 201. Part III EPEE begins at Article 301. Part IV SABRE begins at Article 401. Part V ORGANIZATION begins at Article 501. Part VI DISCIPLINARY RULES begins at Article 601. Part VII SCORING EQUIPMENT begins at Article 701.
1995 – ii Rules for Competitions – USFA Table of Contents
PART ONE: GENERAL RULES AND RULES COMMON TO ALL THREE WEAPONS ...... 1 Chapter I – HISTORICAL NOTES ...... 1 Chapter II – APPLICATION OF THE RULES ...... 1 Chapter III – GLOSSARY ...... 1 A) Referee...... 1 B) Competitions ...... 1 C) Explanation of some technical terms commonly used in the judging of fencing ...... 1 Chapter IV – THE FIELD OF PLAY (Cf. 201ff, 301ff, 401ff) ...... 2 Chapter V – THE FENCERS’ EQUIPMENT (Weapons – Equipment – Clothing) (Cf. 205ff, 306ff, 404ff) ...... 3 A) Presentation of equipment for inspection ...... 3 B) Organization of the inspection office ...... 4 C) Inspection equipment and staff ...... 4 GENERAL PROVISIONS ...... 6 Chapter VI – BOUT...... 8 Chapter VII – DIRECTION OF A BOUT AND JUDGING OF TOUCHES...... 12 A) OFFICIALS ...... 12 B) JUDGING BY A JURY...... 14 C) JUDGING WITH A SCORING MACHINE ...... 15 Notes ...... 15 PART TWO: FOIL...... 16 Chapter I – HISTORICAL NOTES ...... 16 Chapter II – FIELD OF PLAY (Cf. 14ff)...... 16 Chapter III – FOIL EQUIPMENT (Weapons – Equipment – Clothing) (Cf. 16ff) ...... 16 A) WEAPONS (Cf. 16ff, 22ff) ...... 16 B) CLOTHING AND EQUIPMENT ...... 18 Chapter IV – CONVENTIONS OF FOIL FENCING ...... 19 A) METHOD OF MAKING TOUCHES ...... 19 B) VALID SURFACE...... 19 C) CORPS A CORPS AND FLECHE ATTACKS ...... 20 D) NUMBER OF TOUCHES – DURATION OF A BOUT ...... 20 E) JUDGING OF TOUCHES IN FOIL ...... 20 Notes ...... 23
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – iii PART THREE: EPEE ...... 24 Chapter I – HISTORICAL NOTES ...... 24 Chapter II – FIELD OF PLAY (Cf. 14ff)...... 24 Chapter III – EPEE EQUIPMENT (Weapons – Equipment – Clothing) (Cf. 16ff) ...... 24 A) WEAPONS (Cf. 22ff) ...... 24 B) EQUIPMENT ...... 26 C) CLOTHING ...... 26 Chapter IV – THE CONVENTIONS OF EPEE FENCING...... 26 A) METHOD OF MAKING TOUCHES ...... 26 B) VALID SURFACE...... 26 C) CORPS A CORPS AND FLECHE ATTACKS ...... 26 D) NUMBER OF TOUCHES – DURATION OF THE BOUT ...... 26 E) THE JUDGING OF TOUCHES IN EPEE ...... 27 Notes ...... 29 PART FOUR: SABRE ...... 30 Chapter I – HISTORICAL NOTES ...... 30 Chapter II – FIELD OF PLAY (Cf. 14ff)...... 30 Chapter III – SABRE EQUIPMENT (Weapons – Equipment – Clothing) (Cf. 16ff) ...... 30 A) WEAPONS (Cf. 22ff) ...... 30 B) EQUIPMENT AND CLOTHING ...... 30 Chapter IV – THE CONVENTIONS OF SABRE FENCING ...... 32 A) METHOD OF MAKING TOUCHES ...... 32 B) VALID SURFACE...... 32 C) CORPS A CORPS AND FLECHE ATTACKS ...... 33 D) NUMBER OF TOUCHES – DURATION OF A BOUT ...... 33 E) JUDGING OF TOUCHES IN SABRE ...... 33 Chapter V – SPECIAL CONDITIONS THAT MUST BE MET BY THE DIFFERENT PARTS OF THE ELECTRICAL SABRE EQUIPMENT ...... 36 Notes ...... 37 PART FIVE: ORGANIZATION OF COMPETITIONS...... 39 Chapter I – COMPETITIONS ...... 39 Chapter II – BODIES RESPONSIBLE FOR ORGANIZATION AND CONTROL...... 39 Chapter III – ENTRIES FOR COMPETITIONS...... 40 Chapter IV – PRE-COMPETITION INSPECTIONS (Cf. 17ff) ...... 41 Chapter V – TIMETABLE...... 41
1995 – iv Rules for Competitions – USFA Chapter VI – INDIVIDUAL COMPETITIONS ...... 41 A) BY POOLS ...... 41 B) BY POOLS WITH A MIXED FORMAT OF POOLS OF FOUR ...... 47 C) BY DIRECT ELIMINATION FOR THE ENTIRE COMPETITION...... 49 D) MIXED FORMAT – ELIMINATION POOLS AND DIRECT ELIMINATION TABLE WITH REPECHAGE, TO QUALIFY SIX FENCERS TO A FINAL POOL ...... 50 E) MIXED FORMAT – ELIMINATION POOLS AND A DIRECT ELIMINATION TABLE WITH REPECHAGE TO QUALIFY EIGHT FENCERS FOR A FINAL RUN BY DIRECT ELIMINATION...... 52 F) MIXED FORMAT – ELIMINATION POOLS AND DIRECT ELIMINATION TABLE WITH REPECHAGE FROM 32 QUALIFYING 8 FENCERS FOR A DIRECT ELIMINATION FINAL ...... 53 Chapter VII – TEAM COMPETITIONS...... 58 A) TEAM EVENTS ENTIRELY BY DIRECT ELIMINATION ...... 60 B) TEAM COMPETITIONS WITH A MIXEDFORMAT: POOLS AND DIRECT ELIMINATION...... 60 Chapter VIII – SPECIAL RULES FOR WORLD CHAMPIONSHIPS, HISTORICAL NOTES ...... 62 A) INDIVIDUAL CHAMPIONSHIPS ...... 62 B) TEAM CHAMPIONSHIPS ...... 62 C) CONDITIONS COMMON TO TEAM AND INDIVIDUAL CHAMPIONSHIPS ...... 62 D) THE OLYMPIC GAMES ...... 63 Chapter IX – RULES FOR THE WORLD UNDER-20 CHAMPIONSHIPS...... 63 Chapter X – RULES FOR THE WORLD CADET CHAMPIONSHIPS...... 64 Notes ...... 65 PART SIX: DISCIPLINARY RULES FOR COMPETITIONS ...... 66 Chapter I – APPLICATION...... 66 Chapter II – THE DISCIPLINARY AUTHORITIES AND THEIR JURISDICTION...... 69 Chapter III – PENALTIES ...... 71 Chapter IV – OFFENSES, THEIR PENALTIES AND THE COMPETENT AUTHORITIES ... 73 Chapter V – PROCEDURE ...... 75 Notes ...... 75 PART SEVEN: AUTOMATIC SCORING EQUIPMENT...... 76 Chapter I – RULES APPLICABLE TO ALL AUTOMATIC SCORING EQUIPMENT ...... 76 Chapter II – SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR THE VARIOUS PARTS OF THE ELECTRICAL FOIL EQUIPMENT ...... 78 A) STATIONARY EQUIPMENT ...... 78 B) WEAPONS (Cf. 712) ...... 80 C) METALLIC VESTS, MASKS AND BODY CORDS ...... 80
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – v Chapter III – SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR THE VARIOUS PARTS OF THE ELECTRICAL EPEE EQUIPMENT ...... 81 A) STATIONARY EQUIPMENT ...... 81 B) WEAPONS (Cf. 712) ...... 81 Chapter IV – SPECIAL CONDITIONS THAT MUST BE FULFILLED BY THE DIFFERENT PARTS OF THE ELECTRIC FOIL EQUIPMENT (continued from Chapter II)...... 83 STATIONARY APPARATUS...... 83 Chapter V – SPECIAL CONDITIONS THAT MUST BE FULFILLED BY THE DIFFERENT PARTS OF THE ELECTRICAL SCORING APPARATUS FOR FOIL (continued from Chapters II & IV) ...... 84 STATIONARY EQUIPMENT ...... 84 Chapter VI – SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR THE VARIOUS PARTS OF THE ELECTRICAL SABRE EQUIPMENT ...... 84 A) STATIONARY APPARATUS ...... 84 B) SENSOR ...... 86 Notes ...... 86
Appendix A: FIE Fencer’s Publicity Code ...... 87 I. General Principles ...... 87 II. Collective Advertising Contract ...... 87 III. Individual Contract ...... 87 IV. Specific Regulations ...... 88 V. Penalties...... 89
Appendix B: FIE Temporary Provisions ...... 91 Temporary Provision 1 ...... 91 A) OLYMPIC GAMES...... 91 B) SENIOR WORLD CHAMPIONSHIPS ...... 91 C) JUNIOR AND CADET WORLD CHAMPIONSHIPS ...... 93 D) CATEGORY “A” COMPETITIONS ...... 94 Temporary Provision 2 ...... 94 Temporary Provision 3 ...... 94 Rules for the Senior Team World Cup Competitions ...... 94 Temporary Provision 4 ...... 94
INDEX ...... 95
1995 – vi Rules for Competitions – USFA B) Competitions PART ONE: § 1. Assaults and bouts GENERAL RULES AND 4 A friendly combat between two fencers (competi- RULES COMMON tors) is called an “assault.” When the score is kept TO ALL THREE WEAPONS in such a combat (competition), it is called a “bout.” § 2. Match Ignorance of the Rules is no excuse. 5 The aggregate of the bouts fenced between the fencers of two different teams is called a “match.” Chapter I – HISTORICAL NOTES Note: In French, the word “match” means a combat The technical rules of the Fédération Internation- between two fencers (“bout” in English). In English, the ale d’Escrime [FIE] were unanimously adopted by word “match” means a contest between two teams the International Congress of National Olympic (“rencontre” in French). Committees held in Paris in June 1914 for use in all § 3. Competition events of the Olympic Games. They were first 6 A competition is the aggregate of the bouts codified in 1914 by the Marquis de Chasseloup- (individual competitions) or of the matches (team Laubat and Monsieur Paul Anspach and issued in competitions) required to determine the winner of 1919 under the title “Rules for Competitions.” the event. They were modified by different FIE Congresses Competitions are distinguished by weapons; by the and were revised after the 1931 Congress and again competitors’ sex, age or occupation (military, after the 1954 Congress, when they were renamed students, etc.); and by the fact that they are “Technical Rules.” They were revised and modern- contested by individuals or teams. ized after the 1958 Congress and renamed “Rules Competitions are said to be by “direct elimination” for Competitions.” when the competitors are eliminated as soon as they The amendments made by Congress between 1964 have received their first defeat (or after their and 1972 were incorporated in the new updated second if the rules specify a repechage table). A edition published in 1972. The amendments made “pool”, on the other hand, is the coming together of by Congress between 1973 and 1983 inclusive were several competitors (or of all the competitors), each incorporated in an updated edition published in of whom fences all the others in order to establish 1983. Subsequent amendments up to and including their respective rankings. the 1995 Congress are included in the current § 4. Championship edition. 7 A championship is a competition held to determine the best fencer or the best team in each weapon, for Chapter II – APPLICATION an association, for a specific region and for a OF THE RULES specific period of time. § 1. Mandatory use of the rules § 5. Tournament 1 These rules are mandatory without modification for 8 A tournament consists of a number of competitions the “official competitions of the FIE,” that is: held at the same place, during the same period of – the World Championships time and for the same purpose. – the fencing events at the Olympic Games – the World Under-20 Championships C) Explanation of some technical terms – the World Cadet Championships commonly used in the judging of 1 – the Category “A” competitions fencing These rules must also be applied at every interna- § 1. Time tional competition of any kind, unless exceptions 9 Fencing time is the time required to perform one are made and announced in advance. simple fencing action. § 2. Exceptions to the rules § 2. Offensive and defensive actions 2 These exceptions must be ratified by the national 10 The different offensive actions are the attack, the federation of the country to which the organizing riposte and the counter-riposte. committee belongs, and should be brought to the –The attack is the initial offensive action made notice of those concerned when the competition is by extending the arm and continuously announced (Cf. 1). threatening the opponent’s valid surface (Cf. 233ff, 417ff). Chapter III – GLOSSARY –The riposte is the offensive action of the fencer who has parried the attack. A) Referee –The counter-riposte is the offensive action of 3 Throughout these rules the word referee means the fencer who has parried the riposte. “President of the Jury” or “Director of the Bout.” The different defensive actions are the parries. –The parry is the defensive action made with the weapon to prevent the attack from arriving.
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 1 Parries are simple (direct) when they are made in A simple and immediate offensive action that the same line as the attack. follows the original attack, without withdrawing the They are circular (counter-parries) when they are arm, after the opponent has parried or retreated, made in the line opposing that of the attack. when the latter has either released the blade without 11 Offensive actions: riposting or has made a riposte that is delayed, a) Attack or riposte indirect or compound. The action is simple when it is executed in one b) Redoublement movement and is either A new action, either simple or compound, against – direct (in the same line), or an opponent who has parried without riposting or – indirect (in another line). who has merely avoided the first action by retreat- The action is compound (composed) when it is ing or evading. executed in several movements. c) Reprise of the attack b) Riposte A new attack executed immediately after a return to The riposte is immediate or delayed, depending on the “on guard” position. what action takes place and the speed of its d) Counter-time execution. Every action made by the attacker against a stop hit Examples: made by his opponent. 1° Simple direct ripostes: – Direct riposte: a riposte that touches the Chapter IV – THE FIELD OF PLAY opponent without leaving the line in which the parry was made. (Cf. 201ff, 301ff, 401ff) – Riposte along the blade: a riposte that 14 The field of play should have an even surface. It touches the opponent by grazing along the should neither advantage nor disadvantage either of blade after the parry. the two adversaries, especially as regards slope and 2° Simple indirect ripostes: light. – Riposte with a disengage: a riposte that When announcing a tournament, the organizers touches the opponent in the line opposite must always state the nature of the field of play on to that in which the parry was made (by which the competition will be fenced. In particular passing under the opponent’s blade if the they must specify if a competition is to be held parry was in the high line, or over the outdoors. blade if the parry was in the low line). 15 That portion of the field of play that is used for – Riposte with a coupé: a riposte that fencing is called the strip. The strip may be made touches the opponent in the line opposite of earth, wood, linoleum, cork, rubber, plastic, to that in which the parry was made (in metal, metallic mesh, or a compound with a every case, by passing the blade in front of metallic base (Cf. 201, 304, 401). the opponent’s point). The width of the strip is 1.50 to 2.00 meters; its 3° Compound ripostes: “useful” length is 14 meters (Cf. Fig. I-1, Strip – Riposte with a doublé: a riposte that Diagram for All Three Weapons). touches the opponent in the line opposite However, the strip should in practice be extended a to that in which the parry was made, after distance of 1.50 to 2.00 meters at each end, to making a complete circle around the enable a competitor who crosses the rear limit of opponent’s blade. the strip to retreat over a continuous and even – Riposte with a one-two: a riposte that surface. touches the opponent in the same line in If the strip is mounted on a platform, the latter must which the parry was made, after the blade not be higher than 0.50 m. has first been into the opposite line by passing under his blade. Etc., etc. § 3. Counter-attacks 12 Counter-attacks are offensive or offensive-defen- sive actions made during the offensive action of the opponent: a) Stop hit: A counter-attack made on an attack. b) Stop hit made with opposition (formerly called the “time-hit”): A counter-attack made by closing the line in which the attack will be completed (Cf. 233ff, 329ff, 418ff). c) Stop hit made within a period of fencing time, i.e. “in time” (Cf. 236, 419f, 421) § 4. Varieties of offensive actions 13 a) Remise
1995 – 2 Rules for Competitions – USFA Figure I-1: Strip Diagram for All Three Weapons
Chapter V – THE FENCERS’ three sensors for each strip, with two per strip held EQUIPMENT in reserve at Weapons Control. (Weapons – Equipment – Clothing) The inspection personnel must verify, before each electric sabre competition, that all the provided (Cf. 205ff, 306ff, 404ff) sensors meet the requirements set forth in article § 1. Responsibility 764. In principle, the sensors will not be inspected 16 Fencers arm, equip and clothe themselves and on the strip. fence on their own responsibility and at their own Note: FIE Temporary Provision 4 states: risk. The safety measures specified in the rules and the Sabre scoring machines that function without sensors attached standards, as well as the methods of (capteurs) are authorized on a experimental basis for the 1994-95 season. A definite decision will be made at inspection required by these rules, are only the 1995 Congress concerning the use of sensors designed to supplement the fencers’ safety, and during the 1995-96 season. cannot guarantee it. They cannot, therefore, whatever the manner in which they are applied, The 1995 Congress voted to remove the sensor effective October 1, 1996. Tournaments held during the impart responsibility to the FIE, the organizers of 1995-96 season may be fenced with or without a competitions, the officials who carry out such sensor. organization, or those who may cause an accident. As of March 1996, the USFA has not made a final § 2. Inspection of fencers’ equipment decision about the use of sensors. (Cf. 53) 17 The fencers are responsible for their equipment A) Presentation of equipment for in- (including weapons and clothing) at the moment spection they present themselves on the strip. Fencers are obliged to present themselves at the In particular, blades, masks and clothing must bear Weapons Inspection Office at the time stated in the the guarantee label specified in the safety standards timetable of each official FIE championship, with attached to the rules. the equipment they intend to use during the event The inspection measures specified by these rules specified. The number of articles handed to the are only intended to help organizers who must Inspection Office for each national team is limited apply the rules and fencers who must always to 20 weapons (4 per fencer), 10 body cords (2 per respect the rules. These inspections can therefore in fencer), 10 metallic vests (2 per fencer), and 10 no way absolve from their responsibilities any masks (2 per fencer). fencers who break the rules. If material or equipment presented to the Inspection For electric sabre competitions, the organizers must Office appears to have been assembled so as to provide an adequate number of sensors to allow allow the registering of touches at will or the
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 3 malfunctioning of the scoring apparatus, the the organizing committee, may have a tolerance representative of the SEMI Commission may, after of plus or minus 0.05 mm, i.e., from 1.45 mm to examination of the irregular items, require a penalty 1.55 mm. against the person who submitted them. – He will check the residual travel by inserting The fencers or the team captain may only insist on between the base of the tip and the barrel a the return of inspected equipment one hour before gauge 0.50 mm thick; with the gauge in place, the start of the event. the machine should not register when the tip is Weapons, equipment and clothing presented to the depressed. This gauge, provided by the Inspection Office after 5 pm on the day before each organizing committee, may have a tolerance of event will be refused. plus or minus 0.05 mm, i.e., from 0.45 mm to Any repairs to equipment rejected during the 0.55 mm. inspection can be carried out in the repair work- For details of the test weight required for inspec- shop. However, repaired equipment will only be tion, see the description in Part VII (Cf. 719, 732). retested after the initial inspection of fencers’ 19 Before the start of each pool, team match or bout equipment has been completed. by direct elimination, the referee must assemble the For direct elimination bouts and finals of the World competitors on the strip and verify that: Championships and Olympic Games, and for finals – For electric foil, the metallic vest conforms to of category “A” competitions, the two fencers will the provisions of article 216 when each report to the referee designated for their bout 5 competitor is standing upright, is “on guard” minutes before reporting to the strip so that the and is in the lunge position. referee may control their equipment. – For epee, each competitor is wearing a jacket No control will be carried out on the strip. If an conforming to the regulations (Cf. 315), and irregularity is discovered, the defective equipment that the material from which the clothing is will immediately be replaced, without penalty. made has not too smooth a surface. At the beginning of the bout, the referee will place – For electric sabre, the metallic jacket conforms the spare controlled equipment near the strip, to the provisions of article 424 when each beside the fencer. competitor is standing upright, is “on guard” and is in the lunge position; and that each sabre B) Organization of the inspection office is fitted with a sensor. The FIE Central Office or the bout committee (or, Before each bout, the fencers, starting with the failing them, the organizing committee), may first called and under the supervision of the appoint one or more special delegates charged with referee, will each choose a sensor, which must verifying the weapons, equipment and clothing of be inserted in the connector within the guard. the fencers. This sensor may not be changed during the This is mandatory at official FIE competitions, bout without permission of the referee, who where the inspection must be supervised by may, if he deems it necessary, first consult a members of the FIE Commission for Electrical technician. Apparatus and Equipment (Cf. 509). – For all three weapons, each fencer is wearing, 18 The pieces of equipment that have been thus under his jacket, a regulation protective inspected will be marked with a distinctive mark. A plastron unless the clothing is made entirely fencer must not, on pain of penalties specified from fabric resistant to 800 Newtons (Cf. 212, below (Cf. 21ff), use any equipment that does not 315, 408). bear this inspection mark. In addition to the measures of inspection mentioned Note: The FIE Executive Committee, at a meeting in above, the referee of a bout may at any time, on his Paris January 14-15, 1995, decided to authorize for the own initiative or at the request of a fencer or team current season the wearing of fencing uniforms that were regulation in 1994 (that is, 350/800 Newton), captain, himself carry out such inspections, verify specifying that beginning April 1, 1995, an 800 Newton inspections already carried out, or even carry out or protective undergarment would be mandatory. have carried out new inspections. USFA Note: The protective plastron must: He will in any case, before each bout or each time a 1. have at least two layers; weapon is changed, verify the presence of a safety 2. include a sleeve down to the elbow label on the fencer’s clothing, blade and mask, the without opening or seam in the region insulation of the conductive wires inside the guard of the armpit; and and the pressure of the spring in electric foil and 3. ensure the best possible protection. epee points. Verification of the wire insulation and It may be fixed to the jacket without being the spring pressure will be repeated each time a entirely sewn in. weapon is changed. C) Inspection equipment and staff For epee, he will check the total travel and the 20 In order to enable the technicians to fulfill their residual travel of the tip (Cf. 732/4): functions, the organizers must supply them with the – He will check the total travel by inserting necessary equipment (gauges, weights, scales, between the base of the tip and the barrel a electrical apparatus, etc.) and the personnel gauge 1.50 mm thick. This gauge, provided by
1995 – 4 Rules for Competitions – USFA Figure I-2: Weapons Inspection Gauge
necessary to carry out this work (Cf. Fig. I-2 for a Examples: sample weapons inspection gauge). – metallic vest with holes where § 3. Nonregulation equipment (Cf. 18, 641) touches are registered as nonvalid, 21 In whatever circumstances, when a fencer on the – body cord or weapon no longer strip is found to be in possession of equipment that functioning, is nonregulation or defective, this equipment will – pressure of the point spring having be immediately confiscated and submitted to the become too weak, experts on duty for examination. The equipment in – the travel in the point no longer question will only be returned to the owner after the regulation, measures necessitated by this examination have the referee will apply neither warnings nor been completed and, if appropriate, after the sanctions. payment of any expenses for repairs. The equip- On the contrary, any touch made with the ment must be reinspected before it is used again. equipment that has become defective will be awarded. A) If there has been a preliminary equipment 3) If, when a fencer appears on the strip inspection or during a bout, it is established that 1) When a fencer appears on the strip: the equipment used by the fencer: – with only one regulation weapon (Cf. a) does not bear the marks of the 604), preliminary inspection, – with a weapon or body cord that does the referee will: not work or that does not conform to – annul the last touch, if any, the rules, scored by the fencer at fault, – without a protective plastron (Cf. 19, – penalize him as specified in above), articles 635, 638, 641 (2nd – with a metallic vest that does not fully group). cover the valid surface, b) does not conform to the rules on a – with clothing that does not conform to matter that could not be checked the rules, during the preliminary inspection, the referee will penalize him as specified the referee will: in articles 635, 637 and 641 (1st group). 2) When an irregularity in the equipment is found in the course of a bout that could have been caused by conditions during the bout:
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 5 – penalize the fencer at fault as The weapon should be so constructed that it specified in articles 635, 637 and cannot normally injure either the user or his 641 (1st group). opponent. Any treatment of a blade so as to modify c) has passed the preliminary inspec- its flexibility by grinding, filing or other methods, is tion but presents irregularities that forbidden (Cf. 207, 308, 406). could have been made deliberately. A) General description d) bears preliminary inspection marks 23 All weapons are composed of the following parts: that have been forged or trans- 1. A flexible steel blade completed at its forward ferred. extremity by a point and at the rear by the e) has been altered so as to allow the tang (the latter enclosed in the hilt when the recording of touches or the mal- weapon is mounted). functioning of the apparatus at 2. A hilt within which the tang of the blade is will: fixed by a locking nut or in any other way, and In cases c), d), and e), the referee must that enables the fencer to hold the weapon. It immediately confiscate the equipment may be composed of one or several parts; in (weapon, body cord and if necessary the the latter case it is divided into a handle (that metallic vest) and have it examined by the is normally held in the hand) and a pommel expert on duty. After having obtained the (rear portion of the hilt that locks the handle opinion of the expert (a member of the onto the tang). Commission for Electrical Apparatus and 3. A metal guard fixed (with the convex portion Equipment at official FIE competitions) towards the front) between the blade and the who has established the facts (Cf. 509), hilt, serving to protect the sword hand. The the referee will apply the following guard may contain a pad or cushion (Cf. 26/2, sanctions, without prejudice to the 712) to reduce the effect of blows. In electrical application of article 615/d: weapons, it will also contain a connector to – In cases c) and d), the referee will which the body cord can be attached. For penalize the fencer at fault as speci- electric sabre, it must also contain a connector fied in articles 635, 639 and 641 (3rd for attaching the sensor (capteur). group). B) Dimensions (Cf. 206ff, 307ff, 404ff) – In case e), the referee will penalize Each weapon has its own design and measurements. the fencer at fault as specified in 24 1. The length of the blade includes the point and articles 635, 640 and 641 (4th group). everything that is added in front of the convex While awaiting the decision of the referee, surface of the guard whether or not it is fixed that bout will be suspended but other to the latter. bouts in the pool may continue. 2. The total length of the weapon and the lengths B) If no preliminary inspection has taken place of its various parts correspond to the distances In this case, only the provisions above of between planes drawn parallel to each other paragraphs 1, 2, and 3 (b,e) of article A are and perpendicular to the axis of the blade. applicable. These planes are situated: On the other hand, if as a fencer appears on the a) at the forward extremity of the weapon strip, or during a bout, irregularities concern- b) at the point where the blade leaves the ing the dimensions or other characteristics of front (convex) surface of the guard his equipment are found, the referee will allow c) at the back of the guard him the time necessary to conform to the d) between the handle and the pommel regulations and will penalize him as specified e) at the rear extremity of the hilt in articles 635, 637 and 641 (1st group). 3. The total length of the weapon is the distance between planes a) and e); the length of the GENERAL PROVISIONS blade, that between a) and b); the length of the C) The members of the Commission for Electrical hilt, that between b) and e); and the depth of Apparatus and Equipment have the right at any the guard, that between b) and c). time to seize a weapon, body cord, metallic 4. The maximum total length of the weapon must vest or any item of equipment or clothing for be less than the greatest permissible length for examination. the blade and the hilt added together. These D) Note: In addition to the penalties above, the latter two lengths must therefore complement rules for judging define for each weapon all the each other to arrive at the total length of the circumstances in which touches made during a weapon. bout are annulled or not annulled. 5. In order to measure either the total length of § 4. Specifications common to all weapons the weapon or the length of the blade, it is 22 All kinds of weapons are authorized providing that essential that the latter should be straight. they conform to the regulations [and the safety Therefore, when measurements are being made standards annexed to the Rules for Competition].
1995 – 6 Rules for Competitions – USFA the blade should be kept straight on a flat compatible with the freedom of movement surface. necessary for fencing. 6. Only the pommel or the locking nut may be 2. It may not in any way risk obstruction of or placed between planes d) and e). injury to the opponent, or include any buckles C) The hilt or openings by which the opponent’s point may 25 1. The maximum length of the hilt for foil and be caught or deflected – except accidentally. epee is 20 cm between planes b) and e), and 18 The jacket and its collar must be completely cm between planes b) and d). For sabre the buttoned or fastened. maximum length of the hilt is 17 cm (refer to 3. The fencers’ clothing may be of different the diagrams in the relevant sections). colors, except on the torso, where it must be 2. The hilt must be able to pass through the same white or a light color. gauge as the guard. It must be so made that Note: At USFA local, divisional, and sectional competi- normally it cannot injure either the fencer or tions, there are no restrictions on colors or decorations his opponent. on uniforms, providing that the uniforms still comply with 3. All types of hilts are allowed, providing that all other requirements. they conform to the regulations that have been It must be made of sufficiently robust material framed with a view to placing the various types and be clean and in good condition. of weapons on the same footing. However, The material from which the equipment is orthopedic grips for epee, whether metal or made must not have a surface that is smooth not, may not be covered with leather or any enough to cause the point, the button or the material that could hide wires or switches. opponent’s touch to glance off (Cf. 313, 408); 4. The hilt must not include any device that the judging of touches must be facilitated as assists the fencer in using it as a throwing much as possible. weapon. [For FIE competitions] Clothing must be made 5. The hilt must not include any device that can completely from material resistant to 800 increase in any way the protection afforded to Newtons. Special attention must be paid to the the hand or wrist of the fencer by the guard; a execution of the seams, if any, in the underarm cross bar or electrical socket that extends area. An undergarment consisting of a plastron beyond the edge of the guard is expressly covering the vital areas of the upper body forbidden. (according to the diagram on page 33 [FIE 6. If the hilt (or glove) includes any device or version] of the appendix to the Rules, “Safety attachment or has a special shape (orthopedic Standards for Manufacturers...”) and resistant grip) that fixes the position of the hand on the to 800 Newtons is also required (effective hilt, the hilt must satisfy the following two April 1, 1995). conditions: a) It must determine and fix one position Note: A regulation protective plastron (underarm only for the hand on the hilt. protector) is required at all USFA competitions, with b) When the hand occupies this one position EITHER a jacket bearing an official FIE label indicating homologation OR a standard jacket. on the hilt, the extremity of the thumb when completely extended must not be For official FIE competitions and during the more than 2 cm from the inner surface of finals of World Cup competitions, foil and the guard. epee fencers may wear between the shoulder and the elbow of the non-weapon arm an D) The guard (Cf. 208, 310, 407) armband 10 cm wide in their national colors. 26 1. The convex face of the guard must have a The edges of the armband must not be white. surface that is smooth and not too bright. It 4. In all weapons, the lower edge of the jacket must be so made that it can neither catch nor must overlap the breeches by at least 10 cm hold the opponent’s point. It must not have a when the fencer is in the “on guard” position raised rim. (Cf. 212, 315, 408). 2. The padding inside the guard must have a For epee the fencer must wear a regulation thickness of less than 2 cm and must not be jacket covering the whole of the trunk (Cf. arranged in such a way as to increase the 315). protection that the guard affords the hand. Women’s equipment also must include breast E) Buttons and points (Cf. 210ff, 311ff, 406ff, protectors made of metal or some other rigid 719ff, 732ff) material inside the jacket (Cf. 215, 315). See the chapters on each weapon and Part VII, 5. The breeches must be fastened below the Chapters II and III. knees. If a fencer wears long trousers, these § 5. Equipment and clothing – general condi- must be fastened or buttoned at the ankles. tions With breeches, the fencer must wear white 27 1. The equipment and clothing must provide the socks. These must entirely cover the legs right competitor with the maximum protection up to the breeches and must be held up in such a way that they cannot fall down.
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 7 Figure I-3: Mask Punch
The fencer is permitted to wear socks with a 10 an instrument with a spring-loaded point (Cf. cm high turn-over in his national team colors. Fig. I-3, Mask Punch). 6. For all weapons, the cuff of the glove must in A mask that does not comply with the safety all circumstances fully cover approximately requirements laid down in article 27/7 will be half the forearm of the competitor’s sword arm rendered visibly unusable by the weapons to prevent the opponent’s blade from entering inspection personnel or the referee in the the sleeve of the jacket. presence of the person who presented the mask 7. The mask must be made up with a mesh (space to weapons inspection or of the team captain of between the wires) of maximum 2.1 mm, with the fencer concerned. wires having a minimum gauge of 1.0 mm However, a mask made from stainless steel diameter. mesh is permissible and need not be tinned. [For FIE competitions] Masks for all weapons must be made according to the safety standards Chapter VI – BOUT and must bear the quality label as provided for in those standards. § 1. Method of fencing (Cf. 16) For foil, the mesh of the mask must be insu- 28 The competitors fence in their own ways and at lated inside and out (Cf. 218, 722/4). their own risk and peril with the only condition For sabre, the mesh of the mask may not be being the observance of the fundamental rules of insulated, and must guarantee electrical fencing. conductivity. The bib and trim must be All bouts or matches must, however, preserve the completely covered by a metallic fabric; the character of a courteous and honest encounter. All trim may also be made from metal. abnormal actions (a fleche ending in a collision that The bib and other trim must be white. jostles the opponent, disorderly fencing, any fall, During weapon inspection, if there is a question about the mask, the inspector may verify that the mesh of the mask, both at the front and at the sides, is able to withstand, without permanent deformation, the introduc- tion into the mesh of a conical instrument (the angle of the surface of the cone being at 4 degrees to the axis) at a pressure of 12 kilograms. All masks will be checked at every official FIE competition and at the Olympic Games, using
1995 – 8 Rules for Competitions – USFA abnormal movements, brutal hits, touches made either permanently or temporarily, in an open or while falling) are strictly forbidden. concealed manner – be transformed into a throwing Before the start of the bout, both fencers must weapon; it must be used without the hand leaving salute the opponent, the referee and the audience. If the hilt and without the hand being slipped along one of the fencers does not obey this rule, the the hilt from front to back during an offensive referee will give a Red Card. Failure to comply action. following the Red Card will result in exclusion When the handle has a special device or attachment from the competition. If both fencers commit this or a special shape (e.g. orthopedic), it must be held fault, they will be excluded from the competition. in such a way that the upper surface of the thumb is When the last touch has been scored, the bout is not in the same plane as the groove of the blade for foil ended until both fencers have saluted each other, or epee and perpendicular to the plane of the the referee and the audience. The fencers must flexibility of the blade for sabre. therefore remain still during the decision of the The weapon must be used with one hand only; a referee and proceed with the salute once the fencer may not change hands until the end of the decision has been given. bout unless the referee gives special permission If the winner does not comply with this rule, the because the hand or arm is injured. last touch awarded will be annulled. If the loser The use of the hand and arm that are not used to does the same, the penalty will be suspension for hold the weapon to carry out an offensive or two competitions. If both fencers do not comply defensive action is forbidden. with this rule, they will be excluded from the In foil, it is equally forbidden during the course of competition and suspended for two competitions. the bout to protect or cover the valid surface with The fencer’s salute is performed by bringing the the unarmed hand or arm or any other nonvalid guard of the weapon to the chin. It is followed, at surface. the end of each bout, by shaking the opponents’ In sabre, it is forbidden to protect or substitute a hand, using the unarmed hand. valid surface with another part of the body, either by covering or an abnormal movement. [USFA variation: Before the start of the bout, the referee will instruct the fencers to salute. The fencers must During the bout, the fencer’s unarmed hand must salute each other, the referee, and the audience. After not in any case take hold of any part of his electri- the last touch is scored, the bout is not ended until both cal equipment. fencers have again saluted in the same fashion. Any For all these offenses, the referee will penalize the fencer failing to salute after the referee’s instruction is fencer at fault as specified in articles 635, 637 and penalized by a Group 3 Red Card, followed by Black 641 (1st group). Card upon a second failure to salute. § 4. Putting on guard In foil, it is forbidden to place the shoulder of the 31 The fencer who is called first should place himself non-weapon arm forward of the shoulder of the to the right of the referee, except in the case of a weapon arm during the course of fencing. bout between a right- and a left-hander, if the left- The fencer on or off the strip must keep the mask hander is called first. on until the referee calls “Halt.” In no case may the The referee places each of the two competitors in fencer address the referee before the referee’s such a way that the front foot of each is 2 meters decision. from the center line of the strip (that is, behind the For all these offenses, the referee will penalize the “on guard” lines). fencer at fault as specified in articles 635, 637 and Competitors are always put on guard, whether at 641 (1st group) the beginning of the bout or subsequently, in the § 2. Correctness of the touch center of the width of the strip. During replacement 29 When fencing foil and epee with nonelectric on guard in the course of the bout, the distance weapons, every thrust with the point must arrive between the fencers must be such that, in the “on clearly and distinctly to be counted as a touch (Cf. guard” stance, with arms extended and points “in 219, 316). line”, the tips of the weapons cannot touch. In sabre, when fencing with nonelectric weapons, Replacement on guard at distance cannot cause a thrusts with the point and cuts with the edge and fencer who was in front of the rear limit line at the reverse edge must arrive clearly and distinctly (Cf. time the bout was halted to be placed behind that 409). rear limit line. § 3. Method of holding the weapon If he already had one foot behind the rear limit line, 30 With all three weapons, defense must be effected he holds his position. exclusively with the guard and the blade used either Replacement on guard at distance after crossing a separately or together. lateral boundary of the strip may place the fencer at In the absence of a special device or attachment or fault behind the rear limit line and result in a touch. special shape (e.g. orthopedic), the fencer is free to Competitors come on guard when the referee gives hold the handle in any way he wishes and he may the order “On Guard,” after which the referee asks, also alter the position of his hand on the handle “Are you ready?” On receiving an affirmative reply, during a bout. However, the weapon must not – or in the absence of a negative reply, he gives the
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 9 signal for the bout to commence with the word judges exchange places from right to left “Fence.” and vice versa. The fencers must come on guard correctly and However, with electrical scoring apparatus remain completely still until the command “Fence” competitors do not change ends during the is given by the referee (in foil and sabre, fencers bout (but Cf. 31, 545). may not come on guard with the point “in line”). 4. Except in exceptional circumstances, the If during a bout the referee notices that one of the referee cannot allow a fencer to leave the strip. fencers is making use of his unarmed hand or arm If a competitor does so without permission he or protecting or covering valid surface with a is subject to the penalties in articles 635, 637 nonvalid surface, he may call for the help of two and 641 (1st group). judges (as neutral as possible) who will be ap- § 6. Fencing at close quarters pointed by the bout committee. These judges, one 33 Fencing at close quarters is allowed as long as the on each side of the strip, will watch one fencer each competitors can wield their weapons correctly and and will signal, by raising their hands or when the referee can, in foil and sabre, continue to follow asked by the referee, if the unarmed hand or arm the action. has been used or if valid surface has been protected or covered. The referee alone then decides on the § 7. Corps à corps penalties to impose (Cf. 222, 635, 637, 641-1st 34 Corps à corps exists when the two competitors are group). in contact; when this occurs the referee must stop The referee may also make the fencers change the bout (Cf. 37, 224, 318, 412). places so that the fencer breaking this rule does not In foil and sabre it is forbidden to cause corps à have his back to the referee. corps (even without brutality or violence). In all three weapons, it is forbidden to cause § 5. Beginning, stopping and restarting the bout intentional corps à corps to avoid being touched or 32 1. As soon as the command “Fence” has been that jostles the opponent. given the competitors may begin offensive In the case of such an offense, the referee will actions. No action started or made before this penalize the fencer at fault as specified in articles command is counted. 635, 637 and 641 (1st group). 2. The bout stops on the command “Halt,” except in the case of special occurrences that modify § 8. Evasions – displacements and passings the regular and normal conditions of the bout 35 Displacements and ducking are allowed, including (Cf. 47). those actions during which the unarmed hand may As soon as the command “Halt” has been come into contact with the ground. given, the competitors may not start any new It is forbidden to turn one’s back on one’s opponent actions; only an action that began before the in the course of fencing. order was given remains valid. Everything that In the case of such an offense, the referee will takes place afterwards is entirely invalid (but penalize the fencer at fault as specified in articles Cf. 47). 635, 637 and 641 (1st group). If a competitor stops before the command When a fencer passes his opponent during a bout, “Halt” and is touched, the touch is valid. the referee must immediately call “Halt” and The command “Halt” is also given if the replace the competitors in the positions that they fencing of the competitors is dangerous, occupied before they passed one another. confused or contrary to the rules; if one of the When touches are made in the course of passing, a competitors is disarmed or leaves the strip; or touch made immediately is valid; a touch made if, while retreating, he approaches too near the after passing his opponent by the competitor who spectators or the jury (Cf. 43, 231/7). has made the passing movement is annulled, but a 3. After each valid touch is scored the competi- touch made immediately, even by turning around, tors are put on guard in the middle of the strip. by the competitor who has been subjected to the If the touch is not allowed, they are placed in offensive action is valid. the position that they occupied when the bout When during a bout a fencer who has made a fleche was interrupted (however, Cf. 226, 320, 414). attack has a touch registered against him and The competitors change ends: continues to run beyond the extreme limit of the – outdoors, after each touch; strip sufficiently far to cause the reel or the – indoors, after each encounter; or, for bouts connecting line to the reel to be torn out, the touch taking place for several touches, after one that he has received will not be annulled (Cf. 625). of the competitors has scored half the § 9. Ground gained or lost maximum number of touches that he can 36 When the order “Halt” is given, ground gained is score. In sabre, if one of the competitors is held until a touch has been awarded. When the left-handed and if the referee cannot cross competitors are replaced on guard, each fencer to the other side of the strip, the competi- should retreat equally in order to attain fencing tors remain in their positions and the distance (Cf. 31).
1995 – 10 Rules for Competitions – USFA At the beginning of each period in a direct elimina- § 11. Duration of the bout tion bout and at the beginning of any additional Note: See the comments following Articles 47 and 49. minute of fencing time, the fencers are replaced on guard at the center of the strip [behind the “on 45 Duration of the bout is taken to mean the effective guard” lines]. duration: that is, the total of the intervals of time 37 However, when the bout has been stopped because between the commands “Fence” and “Halt.” The of corps à corps, the fencers are replaced on guard time taken for the deliberations of the jury and so that the competitor who has sustained the other interruptions is therefore not counted. corps à corps is at the place he previously occu- The duration of the bout must be registered exactly pied; this also applies if his opponent has subjected by a timekeeper appointed by the organizing him to a fleche attack, even without corps à corps. committee (mandatory for official FIE competitions For replacement on guard at fencing distance, the – Cf. 59). provisions of article 31, third paragraph, must be For the finals of all official FIE competitions, as observed. well as for all bouts in which a clock is visible to the spectators, the clock must be placed so that it is § 10. Crossing the limits of the strip equally visible to both fencers on the strip and to a) Stopping the bout the referee. 38 When a competitor crosses one of the boundaries The actual duration of a bout is: of the strip with both feet, the referee must immedi- – in epee for one touch: 5 minutes; ately call “Halt” and annul everything that occurred – in all weapons for 4 touches: 5 minutes after the boundary was crossed, except a touch for 5 touches: 6 minutes received by the competitor who crossed the for 8 touches: 8 minutes boundary (even after he crossed it), provided that for 10 touches: 10 minutes. this touch was made immediately as part of the 46 One minute before the expiration of regulation movement in the course of which he crossed the time, the timekeeper must stand up and call “One boundary. minute” (without stopping the clock). This warns When one of the two fencers leaves the strip, only a the referee, who stops the bout and warns the touch made by the fencer who remains on the strip fencers that they have approximately one minute may be counted as valid, even in the case of a before the expiration of the time allowed for actual double touch (Cf. 329ff). fencing. b) Rear limits An action initiated at the time of the referee’s 39 A fencer who crosses his rear limit of the strip with “Halt” remains valid. both feet will receive a penalty touch. The fencers may ask how much time remains each 40 Deleted. time that the bout is halted. 41 Deleted. At the expiration of regulation fencing time, the 42 Deleted. timekeeper must call “Halt” or operate an audible c) Lateral boundaries signal to stop the bout; in this case even an action 43 When a competitor crosses a lateral boundary of initiated at the time of the referee’s “Halt” is not the strip with one foot he is not penalized, but the valid. referee must immediately call “Halt” and replace In case of a failure of the clock or an error by the the competitors on guard on the strip. timekeeper, the referee himself must estimate how A competitor who crosses a lateral boundary of the much fencing time remains. strip with both feet is penalized. For replacement 47 For the finals of official FIE competitions, the on guard, his opponent will advance one meter warning at one minute before the end of regulation from the position that he occupied when the time must be made automatically by the clock, crossing occurred; the competitor who is penalized which must set off an audible signal. The referee, must retreat to regain fencing distance. alerted by the clock, stops the bout and warns the When the application of this penalty places a fencers that they have approximately one minute competitor with both feet beyond the rear limit of before the expiration of time allowed for actual the strip, that competitor is considered as having fencing (Cf. 46). An action initiated at the time of been touched. the referee’s “Halt” at the stopping of the bout is A fencer who crosses one of the boundaries of the valid (Cf. 702/5, 709/8&9). strip with both feet to avoid being touched – At the expiration of regulation fencing time the especially when making a fleche – will be penal- clock must automatically set off a loud audible ized as specified in articles 635, 637 and 641 (1st signal and block the scoring machine, without group). canceling touches registered before the disconnec- d) Leaving the strip accidentally tion. The bout stops with the audible warning. 44 A competitor who crosses one of the boundaries of Note: The current FIE and USFA format specifies for all the strip as the result of an “accidental cause” (such weapons a 4 minute duration for a 5 touch bout, and as jostling) incurs no penalty whatsoever. three periods of 3 minutes’ duration each, with a 1 minute rest between periods, for a 15 touch direct elimination bout.
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 11 Regardless of the presence or absence of a chronom- § 12. Accidents – withdrawal of a competitor eter visible to both fencers, no warning or audible signal 50 For an injury that occurs in the course of a bout and is given to indicate the start of the final minute of that is duly confirmed by the delegate of the FIE fencing time. At any halt in the bout, the fencers may Medical Commission or the doctor on duty, a break ask how much time remains. in the bout lasting no longer than 10 minutes is See the complete text of the FIE Temporary Provisions, attached to these Rules, for more details. allowed, timed from the point at which the bout was stopped and strictly reserved for the treatment 48 If a fencer improperly endeavors to cause or of the accident that brought it about. Before or at prolong interruptions in the bout, the referee will the end of the ten minute break, if the doctor penalize him as specified in articles 635, 637 and considers that the fencer is incapable of continuing 641 (1st group). the bout, he will advise the referee that the fencer 49 When the time limit expires before the bout is should withdraw (individual events) and/or be completed, the procedure to be followed is as replaced (team events) (Cf. 558, 562). specified for each weapon (Cf. 226, 321, 414, During the remainder of the same day, a further 555A). break may not be allowed unless as a result of a Note: FIE Temporary Provision 1 states, in part: new injury. A pool bout is finished when: In the case of an unjustified request for a break in the bout that is duly confirmed as such by the • one of the fencers has scored five touches, or representative of the FIE Medical Commission or • four minutes of actual fencing time have elapsed. by the doctor on duty, the referee will penalize the There will be no warning for the final minute. fencer at fault as specified in articles 635, 638 and In the case of a tie at the end of regulation time, before 641 (2nd group). allowing an additional minute to decide between the two In team events a fencer judged unable to continue a fencers by the first decisive touch, the referee will bout by the doctor may, nevertheless, according to randomly designate which fencer will be the winner the decision of the same doctor, fence in subse- should the tie persist after the additional minute. After quent matches on the same day. this random selection, and before the bout recom- The bout committee may modify the bout order in mences, a visible indication (in writing or by a light) of order to ensure the good running of the competition which fencer has the priority must be made. (Cf. 520). The score shall be noted on the scoresheet as follows: 51 Deleted. V 5 – D 4: If a touch is scored during the time of the 52 The referee may, after taking the advice of the bout, doctor on duty, on his own authority require the V 5 – D 5: a) If the random selection chose the withdrawal of a fencer whose inability to continue winner, or is flagrant. b) If in epee the score was 5/5 at the expiration of the time of the bout. Chapter VII – DIRECTION OF A BOUT The direct elimination bouts are for 15 touches, with a AND JUDGING OF TOUCHES maximum time of nine minutes, divided into three periods of three minutes, with one minute of rest A) OFFICIALS between periods. During this minute, a coach desig- § 1. Referee nated before the bout can address the fencer. The scoring apparatus blocks itself at the end of each three 53 All bouts of fencing are directed by a referee who minute period. There is no warning for the final minute. has many duties: a) he calls the roll of the competitors (Cf. 604, The bout ends when: 615, 641); • one of the fencers has scored 15 touches, or b) he directs the bout (Cf. 63); • nine minutes of actual fencing time have elapsed. c) he verifies that the fencers’ materials and The fencer having scored the greater number of equipment bear the proper inspection marks, touches is declared the winner. especially those items concerned with safety, In the case of a tie at the end of regulation time, before according to the special provisions for each allowing an additional minute to decide between the two weapon. He inspects the insulation of the fencers by the first decisive touch, the referee will wiring, particularly inside the guard (Cf. 18, randomly designate which fencer will be the winner 217, 314, 425, 428, 712); should the tie persist after the additional minute. After d) he supervises his assistants (judges, floor this random selection, and before the bout recom- judges and arm judges, timekeepers, scorers, mences, a visible indication (in writing or by a light) of etc.) (Cf. 54ff); which fencer has the priority must be made. e) he maintains order (Cf. 615); In this case, the score shall be noted on the scoresheet f) he penalizes offenses (Cf. 615); and as V/14. g) he awards touches (Cf. 67, 69, 75). See the complete text of the FIE Temporary Provisions, § 2. Jury, judges, and floor judges attached to these Rules, for more details. 54 The referee fulfills his duty either with the help of four judges or with the use of an apparatus for the
1995 – 12 Rules for Competitions – USFA automatic registering of touches; with the latter he – two to four may be chosen without considering may be assisted if necessary by two floor judges or their nationality. two judges watching for the use of the unarmed The drawing of lots, for the first four bouts, will be hand (Cf. 31). from among the completely neutral referees. Floor judges are required when there is no metallic It is necessary to avoid “crossed” officiating for the strip. quarters of the table. The referee and the judges (or the floor judges) After the first four bouts of the finals, the drawing constitute the “Jury.” For all bouts in the finals, the of lots will be carried out again, taking into referee must be assisted by two judges, each consideration the nationalities of the fencers still watching one of the fencers in order to draw competing. attention to any use of the non-sword arm or any B – TEAM COMPETITIONS other nonvalid part (Cf. 30, 31, 71, 641-1st group): From the quarter-finals of team competitions: – in foil, either to deflect the opponent’s blade or – if the team captains agree to accept the referees to cover part of the valid surface; proposed by the bout committee and the – in epee, to deflect the opponent’s blade. In Fencing Officials Commission, no drawing of epee they will also fulfill the functions of floor lots will take place; judges (Cf. 30, 31, 71). – if the team captains do not agree, the delegates – in sabre, to replace a valid surface with other of the Fencing Officials Commission and the parts of the body on which touches cannot be bout committee will choose from among the registered. neutral “A” referees present the two, three or Arm and floor judges must change ends halfway four referees who appear suitable, and lots will through each bout or between each segment [of a be drawn among these referees. DE bout] so as not to judge the same fencer the 58 For individual finals comprising at least six fencers entire time (Cf. 555C) . and from the semi-finals of team competitions there 55 By accepting a position on a jury, each of the will be, whenever possible, two complete juries (or members concerned pledges his honor to respect two referees when judging with a machine). (This is the rules and to cause them to be respected, and to mandatory for official FIE competitions (Cf. 507).) carry out his duties with the strictest impartiality and most sustained attention (Cf. 610). § 3. Auxiliary personnel 56 In official FIE competitions all members of a jury 1. Scorers and timekeepers must be amateurs and licensed. 59 Whenever possible the organizers will appoint, on In other international competitions they must, if their own responsibility, scorers whose duty it will they are amateurs, be licensed. be to keep the scoresheets and scoreboards and a timekeeper whose duty it will be to keep time for 57 Selection of officials the duration of the bouts (Cf. 45ff). (This is A – INDIVIDUAL COMPETITIONS mandatory for the official FIE competitions.) For For the rounds of pools, the bout committee will the finals, the bout committee may assign a designate neutral officials, chosen by lot from a list representative or a referee, as neutral as possible, to prepared by the Fencing Officials Commission supervise the work of the timekeeper, the scorer representative. and the superintendent of the apparatus. For the direct elimination table (and the repechage), 2. Specialist personnel the representative of the Fencing Officials Commis- 60 When judging is done with the assistance of a sion will submit [USFA variation: may submit] to machine for registering touches, the organizing the bout committee a sufficiently large list of the committee will further appoint: best officials. From these officials, the bout a) A superintendent of the apparatus committee will draw lots to determine who will The organizing committee must choose qualified direct each bout, in the order of the table, taking persons who should follow the working of the nationalities into consideration (for tables B, E, and apparatus with careful attention in order that they F, by 1/4 table). In the case of a nationality conflict, may be able to advise the referee as to what the the chosen referee will be assigned to the next bout machine has registered, and notify him, even during in the order of the table. the course of a bout, regarding any abnormal At the beginning of each round, the representative phenomena that may occur. of the Fencing Officials Commission may recom- While fencing is in progress the superintendent of mend to the bout committee chair the removal of a the apparatus must not touch the apparatus. When referee whose performance has not been satisfac- fencing ceases, he resets the machine either after tory. the referee has given his decision or when the For the final, the representative of the Fencing competitors are testing their weapons, but he must Officials Commission will draw up [USFA varia- never, after a phrase of the bout has caused the tion: may draw up] a list of from four to eight machine to signal a touch, annul this signal before referees, of whom: the referee has given his decision. – two to four must be completely neutral,
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 13 b) One or more experts which fencer a touch will be scored by applying the For each tournament, the organizing committee conventional rules for each weapon. must appoint experts in matters relating to electrical b) Materiality of the touch scoring. These experts are placed under the 68 As soon as the bout has been stopped, the referee supervision of the bout committee. briefly analyzes the actions that composed the last The experts may be consulted, separately or jointly, fencing phrase before the order “Halt” (this by the referees or by the bout committee regarding formality is not required in epee) and in the course all questions relating to the electrical apparatus. of his analysis he questions the judges watching Members of the FIE Commission for Electrical one fencer in order to ascertain whether in their Apparatus and Equipment are ex officio qualified opinion any of the actions occurring in his analysis to act as experts. of the phrase has resulted in a touch on that c) The technicians competitor; he then follows the same procedure The organizing committee must, for any interna- with the two judges of the other competitor. (This tional tournament, ensure the presence of compe- formality must be observed in all three weapons). tent technicians to fix any damage that may occur When the judges are questioned they must reply in during the competition in the personal equipment of one of the following ways: “Yes,” “Yes, but not the fencers and, if necessary, in the rest of the valid,” “No” or “I abstain.” The referee votes last. electrical apparatus. 69 The referee then totals the votes thus made from each side; the opinion of each judge counts as one B) JUDGING BY A JURY vote, the opinion of the referee as one and a half § 1. The duties of the referee votes, while abstentions are not counted at all: 61 The referee takes up a position at a distance from 1° If both judges on the same side agree in a the strip that enables him to follow the actions of positive opinion (either both say “Yes” or both the fencers completely; he follows the competitors say “No” or both say “Yes, but not valid”), in their movements on the strip. their judgment prevails. For the finals of official FIE competitions, he must 2° If one of the judges has a definite opinion and use a microphone, preferably without a cord. He the other abstains, the referee may decide by directs the bout according to the provisions of the himself as his vote is overriding; if he also rules (Cf. 227ff, 322ff, 415ff),. abstains, the decision of the judge who has a § 2. Positions occupied by the judges definite opinion prevails. 62 Two judges are placed on each side of the strip to 3° If the two judges concerned are positive but the referee’s right and left respectively and slightly contrary in their opinions or if both abstain, the referee may decide according to his own behind the competitors. 4 The two judges placed to the referee’s right should observations; if he also abstains, the touch is watch the fencer to the referee’s left and especially regarded as doubtful (Cf. 69/5). verify the arrival of touches that this competitor 4° In the case of a double abstention, the referee may receive. may, as an exceptional measure, ask the Similarly, the two judges placed to the referee’s left opinions of the other two judges if he consid- should watch the fencer to the referee’s right and ers that they were better placed to see the especially verify the arrival of touches that this touch: competitor may receive (however Cf. 69/4). – for example, a riposte on the back made on a fencer who has made a fleche attack § 3. Method of judging and has passed his opponent. a) Procedure 5° A doubtful touch is never scored against the 63 The referee, who alone is responsible for the competitor who might have received it. On the direction of the bout, gives the orders. However, other hand, any touch made subsequently or any other member of the jury may give the com- simultaneously in the same phrase by the mand “Halt,” but only in the case of a presumed fencer who has thus been granted the benefit of accident. Also, the timekeeper stops the bout by the doubt must also be annulled (but Cf. 38). calling “Halt!” when time expires. As regards a touch made subsequently by the 64 As soon as a judge sees a touch arrive (whether on fencer who originally made the doubtful touch, a valid surface or not) on the fencer whom he is the following courses will apply: watching he must raise his hand in order to advise a) If the new touch (remise, redoublement or the referee. riposte) is made by the fencer who made 65 All judging is carried out aloud and without the the doubtful touch without any touch members of the jury leaving their places. having been made by his opponent, this 66 The jury is not bound by the acknowledgment of a new touch must be awarded. touch even if properly made by a competitor (Cf. b) But if the doubt concerns the surface on 606). which the touch arrived (one “Yes” and 67 The jury first decides as to the materiality of the touch or touches. The referee then alone decides for
1995 – 14 Rules for Competitions – USFA one “Yes, but not valid”), no other touch § 2. Method of judging in this phrase may be awarded. a) Materiality of the touch c) This is also the case if the opponent has 72 The materiality of the touch is established accord- himself made a doubtful touch between ing to the indications of the machine, if necessary the first doubtful touch and the new touch after consulting the floor judges (Cf. 74). made by that same fencer. Only the indications of the electrical scoring c) Validity or priority of the touch machine may be taken into consideration for 70 After the jury has decided the materiality of a scoring touches. Under no circumstances may the touch, the referee, acting alone and by applying the referee declare a competitor to have scored a touch conventional rules for each weapon, decides for unless the touch has been properly registered by the which fencer a touch is to be awarded, whether machine, except as specified in the rules (Cf. 222, both have scored (epee), or if there is no valid 226, 321, 414, 555A) and in the case of penalty touch (Cf. 232ff, 329ff, 416ff). touches (Cf. 228ff, 323ff, 415ff, 626). 73 On the other hand, the referee must, in the cases C) JUDGING WITH A SCORING enumerated for each weapon, annul a touch MACHINE registered by the machine (Cf. 230ff, 324ff). § 1. Direction of the bout 74 Only the two floor judges, who each have one vote, 71 1. The bout is directed by the referee who must and the referee, who has one and a half votes, place himself so as to be able to follow the decide if a touch has been made on the ground or actions while being able to see the illumination not. If they cannot reach an affirmative majority of the light signals. decision (i.e. if there are three abstentions or the 2. At the beginning of each bout the referee must two judges are of different opinions and the referee check the weapons, clothing and equipment of abstains), the touch must be considered doubtful the fencers. (Cf. 69/5). In no circumstances may the referee take For the weapon inspection, which must also be account of the opinions of other persons. performed each time a weapon is changed, the b) Validity or priority of the touch referee must verify the strength of the point 75 After reaching his decision regarding the material- spring by means of the special weight, the ity of a touch, the referee, by applying the conven- insulation of the wires inside the guard and, in tional rules for each weapon, decides for which the case of epee, the total travel and residual fencer a touch is to be awarded, whether both have travel of the tip with the 1.50 mm and 0.50 mm scored (epee) or if there is no valid touch (Cf. gauges (Cf. 18, 21, 719, 732). 232ff, 329ff, 416ff). When the machine is equipped with yellow lights the referee will, for foil, check that Notes contact between the blade or guard of the foil 1) It is stressed that this chapter is not designed as a and the same fencer’s metallic vest causes the manual on fencing and that it is only included here corresponding yellow light to light up. in order to help the reader to understand the rules. If the light or lights remain permanently lit 2) Examples: without it being possible to cancel them by 1. Judge A says “No”; Judge B says “Yes, but not pressing the reset button, the bout must not be valid.” Even if the referee considers the touch started or continued until the insulation fault in valid, the judgment must be “no touch.” the circuit has been repaired. However, in this example as one judge and the 3. The referee oversees the proper functioning of referee agree that there has been contact with the electrical apparatus. Either on his own the point of the opponent, anything that occurs initiative or at the request of a team captain or after the “no touch” decision must be annulled. competitor, he will have the necessary tests 2. Judge A says “Yes,” Judge B says “Yes, but made in order to check the apparatus and not valid,” and the referee abstains. He cannot localize any faults that may be found. He will therefore score the touch as there is doubt as to prevent the competitors from complicating the whether or not it arrived on a valid surface. results by unplugging or untimely changing of However, as both judges are agreed that there their equipment. was contact with the point on the opponent, 4. If there are floor judges, they are placed on anything that occurs after the “no touch” either side of the referee and on opposite sides decision must be annulled. of the strip; they observe all actions during the bout (Cf. 54). 5. The referee should consult the experts for the electrical apparatus whenever he considers it necessary (Cf. 60).
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 15 PART TWO: FOIL 204 The table on which the scoring machine is placed must be at least 1 meter from the strip and opposite the center line; the referee must ensure Chapter I – HISTORICAL NOTES that its isolation is maintained by the auxiliary The Rules for Foil were adopted 12 June 1914 by personnel as well as the fencers and the spectators. the FIE Committee for Foil at a meeting in Paris under the presidency of General G. Ettore, representing the Italian Fencing Federation, who Chapter III – FOIL EQUIPMENT edited the proposed rules. (Weapons – Equipment – Clothing) They were basically the same as those drawn up by (Cf. 16ff) Monsieur Camille Prévost, President of the Académie d’Armes and President of the Technical A) WEAPONS (Cf. 16ff, 22ff) Committee for Foil of the French National § 1. General specifications for foils Fencing Federation. They also conformed to the a) Weight rules drawn up by the Marquis de Chasseloup- 205 The total weight of the foil ready for use is less Laubat for “Les Armes de France,” to the various than 500 grams. earlier international regulations drawn up by the different countries affiliated with the FIE, and to b) Length the Franco-Italian Rules. 206 The maximum total length of the foil is 110 cm. The present rules merely define and complete c) The blade those adopted in 1914. 207 The blade is rectangular in cross-section and must The rules governing foil competitions judged with be made from steel in accordance with the safety electrical scoring apparatus were adopted in 1957 standards annexed to the rules. and modified by various later Congresses up to the The edges must be smoothed off so that they will present date. not cut, and must be chamfered at an angle of 45°± 5°), 0.5 mm on each side (± 0.1 mm), so that they will neither cut nor become capable of Chapter II – FIELD OF PLAY (Cf. 14ff) cutting. 201 Foil competitions are held indoors on strips made The blade is mounted with the widest dimension of wood, linoleum, cork, rubber, plastic, etc. placed horizontally. For competitions judged with electrical apparatus, The maximum length of the blade is 90 cm (Cf. the strip and its extensions must be entirely 24). covered by metal, metallic mesh or a compound The blade must have a flexibility equivalent to a with a metallic base in order to neutralize touches bend of minimum 5.5 cm and maximum 9.5 cm made “on the ground” (mandatory for official FIE measured under the following conditions: competitions) (Cf. 711). 1. The blade is fixed horizontally at a point 70 202 The width of the strip is from 1.50 to 2.00 meters. cm from the extremity of the point. The length of the strip is 14 meters, so that each 2. A 200 gram weight is suspended 3 cm from competitor, being placed 2 meters from the center the extremity of the point. line, has at his disposal for retreating a total 3. The bend of the blade is measured at the distance of 5 meters without it being necessary for extremity of the point between the non- him to cross the limit of the strip with both feet weighted and the weighted positions. (Cf. Fig. (Cf. 15, 38ff and Fig. I-1, Strip Diagram). II-1, Foil Dimensions and Flex Test Dia- 203 Five lines should be drawn very clearly on the grams) strip perpendicular to its length, as follows: All methods of treating a blade between the guard – one center line, which must be drawn as a and the point, either by grinding, filing or other- broken line across the entire width of the wise, are forbidden (Cf. 22). strip. The blade should be as straight as possible. – two on guard lines located 2 meters on either Any curve must be uniform and the bend of the side of the center line (these must be drawn blade in all cases less than 2 cm; curvature is only across the entire width of the strip). permitted in the vertical plane and must be located – two rear limit lines, which must be drawn near the center of the blade. across the entire width of the strip, at a d) The guard (Cf. 26) distance of seven meters from the center line. 208 The guard must be able to pass through a straight In addition, the last two meters of the strip cylindrical tube (gauge) having a diameter of 12 before these rear limit lines must be clearly cm and a length of 15 cm, the blade being parallel distinguished – if possible by a different color to the axis of the cylinder. of strip – to enable the fencers easily to Eccentric mounting is forbidden; the blade must identify their positions on the strip (Cf. 15, pass through the center of the guard. The diameter 38ff and Fig. I-1, Strip Diagram). A fencer of the guard must be between 9.5 cm and 12 cm. who crosses his rear limit with both feet is (Cf. Fig. II-1, Foil Dimensions and Flex Test considered as touched (Cf. 39). Diagrams)
1995 – 16 Rules for Competitions – USFA Figure II-1: Foil Dimension and Flex Test Diagrams
e) The martingale The distance that the tip must travel back in order 209 When the foil is not secured to the hand by an to cause the scoring machine to register a touch attachment or by the body cord, the use of a may be infinitely short; the total stroke is less than martingale is mandatory. 1 mm. f) Points and tips Sharpening the edges of the point is forbidden. It 210 Unless fitted with an electric point for registering is strictly forbidden to press or drag the point of touches (or another design previously approved), the electric weapon on the metallic strip during the point of the foil must be covered; the flat metal the bout (between “Fence” and “Halt”). It is head of the blade must be covered with waxed equally forbidden, at any time, to straighten the thread, plastic or some other nonmetallic material. weapon on the strip. Any breaking of this rule will be punished according to articles 635, 637 and 641 § 2. Specifications for the electric foil (1st group). 211 In addition to the special conditions regarding construction specified in Part VII (Cf. 702, 712, b) Insulation 718ff), foil fencers’ electrical equipment must The body of the point, apart from any parts that conform to the following conditions: may be insulated; the foil blade for a length of 15 a) The tip cm from the point; and the pommel or the extrem- The pressure that must be exerted on the tip in ity of the grip must be entirely covered with some order to cause the scoring machine to register a insulating material (electrical tape, cellophane touch must be more than 500 grams; this weight tape or even varnish) (Cf. 721). must be lifted by the point (Cf. 719).
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 17 Figure II-2: Metallic Vest for Foil
B) CLOTHING AND EQUIPMENT without omission cover all the valid surface when § 1. General specifications for clothing and he is standing upright, in the “on guard” position equipment for all foilists and lunging (Cf. 220). Whatever the means of fastening used, the a) The jacket metallic material must cover a sufficient area to 212 The lower edge of the jacket, cut horizontally at ensure that it covers the valid surface in all the waist, must overlap the breeches by at least 10 positions of the fencer. The overlap at the closure cm when the fencer is in the “on guard” position must always come from the sword-arm side. (Cf. 27). The metallic collar must have a minimum height The jacket must include a lining making a double of 3 cm. thickness of material for the sleeve down to the The lamé material must satisfy the conditions for elbow [of the sword-arm] and covering the flank its verification detailed elsewhere (Cf. 722). up to the region of the armpit. The shape of the bottom edge of the vest must be In every case, clothing must conform to the safety such that when it is laid flat there is a straight line standards annexed to the rules. between the top of each hipbone and the point of b) The glove junction of the lines of the groin. 213 The glove may be lightly padded (Cf. 27). The band of nonmetallic material passing between c) The mask (Cf. 27, 722/4) the legs must be at least 3 cm wide (Cf. Fig. II-2, 214 The mask must conform to the safety standards Metallic Vest for Foil) annexed to the rules. It is mandatory that the mesh b) Body cord and attachment plugs of the mask stop at the fencer’s chin. 217 The conducting wires of the body cord (fencers’ d) Clothing for women’s foil personal equipment) must be well insulated 215 Women’s clothing must include breeches closed electrically from each other, not affected by below the knee or a divided skirt and, inside the humidity, and twisted or joined together. The body jacket, breast protectors of metal or other rigid cord has a connecting plug at each end. The material (Cf. 27). electrical resistance of each of these conducting § 2. Specifications for clothing and equipment wires (plug to plug and plug to crocodile clip) necessary for electric foil must not exceed 1 ohm. a) Metallic vest – At the reel end the three-prong male connec- 216 The fencer wears over his jacket a metallic vest the tion, which must satisfy the conditions of conductive surface of which must entirely and manufacture and assembly specified in Part
1995 – 18 Rules for Competitions – USFA Figure II-3: Valid Surface for Foil
VII (Cf. 710), will be attached to the wires in c) Mask the following manner: 218 The wire mesh of the mask must be insulated – the prong at 15 mm to the metallic vest; internally and externally with a plastic material – the central prong to the wire in the that will not chip off, applied before the mask is weapon; and assembled (Cf. 722). – the prong at 20 mm to the foil ground circuit or the metallic strip. Chapter IV – CONVENTIONS OF The wire that joins the rear connection of the body cord to the metallic vest by a crocodile FOIL FENCING clip must be separate for at least 40 cm. This A) METHOD OF MAKING TOUCHES wire must be soldered to the crocodile clip and 219 The foil is a thrusting weapon only. Offensive this soldering must not be covered by insula- actions with this weapon must therefore be made tion or any material whatever. However, any with the point and with the point only. When method of attachment that presents the same fencing with nonelectric weapons, any touch with guarantees as soldering may be used, provided the point must arrive clearly and openly to be it has been accepted by the Commission for counted (Cf. 29). Electrical Apparatus and Equipment. The crocodile clip must be strong and ensure B) VALID SURFACE perfect contact with the metallic vest. Its § 1. Limitation of the valid surface width at the point of contact must be at least 220 In foil, only touches that arrive on the valid 10 mm; the inside of the clip must have a free surface are counted. space at least 8 mm long by 3 mm high. It The valid surface for foil, for women as for men, should be clipped to the back of the metallic excludes the limbs and the head. It is confined to vest on the sword-arm side. the trunk, the upper limit being the collar up to 6 – At the end nearest the foil, inside the guard, cm above the prominences of the collarbones; the any method of attachment is allowed, but the side limits are the seams of the sleeves (which chosen method must always conform to the should cross the head of the humerus); the lower specifications in article 712. limit follows a horizontal line across the back Furthermore, the male plugs of the connection joining the tops of the hipbones, thence following must in no circumstances be able to touch the in straight lines to the junction of the lines of the metal part of the guard. groin (Cf. Fig. II-3, Valid Surface for Foil). The wire from the point must be protected by 221 The bib of the mask is part of the valid surface. an insulating sheath from the place where it (Details in the annex to the rules, “Safety Stan- enters the guard to the insulated socket of the dards for Manufacturers...”). plug. Under no circumstances may non- insulated wire extend beyond this insulated Note: Implementation of this rule has been indefinitely socket (Cf. 26, 208, 712). postponed by the FIE. This rule has NOT been adopted by the USFA; the mask remains “off target” in foil.
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 19 § 2. The possible extension of the valid surface I. MATERIALITY OF THE TOUCH 222 However, touches that arrive on a part of the body § 1. With a jury (Cf. 61ff) considered to be nonvalid are counted as valid whenever, by reason of an abnormal position, the § 2. With electrical scoring apparatus fencer has substituted this nonvalid surface for the 228 1. For judging the materiality of touches, only valid surface. The referee may question the judges the indications of the scoring machine may be about this, but he alone must decide whether the taken into consideration. Under no circum- touch is valid or not. stances may the referee declare a competitor to have scored a touch unless the touch has § 3. Non valid surfaces been properly registered by the machine 223 A touch that is made on a nonvalid surface (except as specified in the regulations (Cf. (whether directly or as a result of a parry) is not 222, 226, 555A) and in the case of penalty counted as a valid touch, but it stops the phrase touches) (Cf. 72, 626, 709/4). and annuls all touches that are scored thereafter 229 When using the apparatus it should be noted (but Cf. 222). that: C) CORPS A CORPS AND FLECHE a) if a nonvalid touch occurs, the machine ATTACKS does not register a possible valid touch on the same side. 224 In foil, it is forbidden to cause corps à corps (even b) the machine does not indicate whether without brutality or violence), to cause voluntary there is any priority in time between two corps à corps to avoid a touch, or to jostle the or more touches that it registers simulta- opponent. neously. For these offenses, the referee will penalize the fencer at fault as specified in articles 635, 637 and Note: This rule has not yet been adopted for USFA 641 (1st group). competition; scoring machines have not been altered to block a colored light after a white light on the same side D) NUMBER OF TOUCHES – of the machine. DURATION OF A BOUT FIE Temporary Provision 2 states: Note: Articles 225 and 226 are no longer in effect; see During the 1993-94 season and until scoring machines the comments following Articles 47 and 49, and the FIE include a system for blocking the colored light after the Temporary Provisions, Appendix B of these Rules. illumination of the white light on the same side as 225 In foil, bouts are for five touches for men and for provided in Article 229, machines using the old system of blockage remain acceptable for use. women, with a time limit of six minutes per bout; in direct elimination, either two encounters for 230 2. The referee will disregard touches that are five touches with a deciding encounter if neces- registered as a result of actions: sary, or bouts for any specified number of touches – started before the word “Fence” or after (Cf. 554f., 555A). the word “Halt” (Cf. 32); 226 When the time limit expires before the bout has – that are made on the ground (when there been completed: is no metallic strip, or outside it); or that a) if one competitor has scored more touches are made on any object other than the than his opponent, the number of touches opponent or his equipment (Cf. 73f.). required to bring it up to the maximum being A fencer who voluntarily causes the machine fenced for must be added to his score, and the to register a touch by placing his point on any same number of touches must be added to his surface other than his opponent will be opponent’s score. penalized as specified in articles 635, 637 and b) if both competitors have scored the same 641 (1st group). If in the final minute of number of touches, they are both counted as fencing a fencer voluntarily causes a touch by having scored one less than the maximum placing his point on any surface other than his number of touches and they fence for the last opponent, he will be penalized as specified in touch without any time limit. They are articles 635, 638 and 641 (2nd group). replaced on guard in the positions that they Fencers are forbidden to place a noninsulated occupied when the bout was interrupted (Cf. part of their weapon in contact with their 32/3). metallic vest with the intention of jamming the scoring machine and thus avoiding being E) JUDGING OF TOUCHES IN FOIL touched. 227 Foil competitions are judged with electrical If such an offence is committed, the referee scoring apparatus. This is mandatory for the will penalize the fencer at fault as specified in official FIE competitions. In the case of all other articles 635, 637 and 641 (1st group). competitions, the organizers are required to make When the scoring machine is equipped with an advance announcement if they will be judged yellow lights, these lights light up in three by a jury (Cf. 1f.). cases:
1995 – 20 Rules for Competitions – USFA 1. The yellow lights light up and go out at 4. The referee must also apply the following once; this does not stop the bout. rules: 2. If the yellow lights light up with the a) Only the last touch made before the fault sounding of an audible signal and do not is established may be annulled. go out, the fencer who has placed his b) A competitor who makes any modifica- weapon in contact with his metallic vest tion in or changes his equipment without must be declared touched, even if the being asked by the referee to do so before point arrived on his weapon, provided the referee has given his decision loses all that the referee awards priority to the right to the annulment of the touch (Cf. touch made against him. If the white light 71/3). lights up on the same side as the yellow c) If the bout has effectively recommenced,3 light, the touch is nonvalid. a competitor cannot claim the annulment 3. If the yellow lights light up and do not go of a touch awarded against him before the out, the referee must stop the bout recommencement of the bout. because there must be a fault in the d) The localization of a fault found in the electric circuit. Permanent illumination of equipment (including the competitors’ the yellow lights is often caused by equipment) is of no consequence to a perspiration that dampens the jacket and, possible annulment. particularly, the glove of one of the e) It is not necessary that the established fencers. failure repeat itself each time a test is 231 3. The referee must, on the other hand, take into made, but it is essential that the fault account possible failures of the electrical should be verified by the referee without equipment, in particular: the possibility of doubt at least once a) He must annul a touch that he has just during the tests made by him or under his awarded due to an apparent touch on the supervision. valid surface (colored light) if he estab- f) The mere fact that the competitor against lishes, by tests made under his personal whom a touch has been awarded has supervision, before the bout has effec- broken his blade is not sufficient to justify tively recommenced3 and without any of the annulment of that touch. the equipment in use having changed (Cf. g) The referee must pay particular attention 71/3&5): to touches that are not registered or that – that a touch registered as “valid” are registered abnormally. Should such against the fencer against whom the defects be repeated, the referee must ask a touch was awarded can be made member of the Commission for Electrical without there being in fact a valid Apparatus and Equipment or an expert touch, technician on duty to verify that the – that a “nonvalid” touch made by the equipment conforms to the rules. fencer against whom the touch was The referee must ensure that nothing is awarded is not registered by the altered in the competitor’s equipment or in machine, the whole of the electrical apparatus before – that a “valid” touch made by the the expert makes the inspection. fencer against whom the touch was 5. Whenever accidental causes make it impos- awarded does not cause any touch sible to carry out tests, the touch will be either valid or nonvalid to be considered doubtful (Cf. 69/5). registered, or 6. If touches are registered simultaneously on – that the registration of touches made both sides of the machine and the referee by the fencer against whom the touch cannot establish the priority with certainty, he was awarded does not remain must replace the competitors on guard. recorded on the machine. 7. In accordance with the general rules (Cf. 32), b) On the other hand, when the referee has the referee must stop the bout, even if no awarded priority to a fencer’s touch, this touch is registered by the machine, whenever touch will not be annulled if subsequently fencing becomes confused and he is no longer it is found that a valid touch made by the able to analyze the phrase. opponent is registered as nonvalid or that 8. The referee must also supervise the state of the weapon of the fencer against whom the metallic strip; he must not allow the bout the touch was awarded is permanently to commence or continue if the metallic strip registering a nonvalid touch. has holes in it that might affect the proper c) If a fencer’s equipment does not conform registering of touches. (The organizers must to the provisions of paragraphs 2 to 4 of make the necessary arrangements to permit article 722, a touch made on a nonvalid the rapid repair or replacement of metallic surface that is registered by the machine strips.) as valid will not be annulled.
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 21 II. VALIDITY OR PRIORITY OF THE 7. If the attacker, when attempting to deflect TOUCH the opponent’s blade, fails to find it, the § 1. Introductory note right of attack passes to the opponent. 232 Whatever method a referee has used to make a 8. Continuous forward motion with crossing decision regarding the materiality of a touch of the feet is a preparation, and against (either with the assistance of a jury or with an this preparation any simple attack has electrical scoring apparatus), he alone then priority. decides as to the validity or the priority of the 234 b) The parry gives the right to riposte; a simple touch by applying the following basic rules that riposte may be direct or indirect, but to annul are the conventions applicable to foil fencing. any subsequent action by the attacker, it must be executed immediately, without indecision § 2. Regard for the fencing phrase or delay. 233 a) Every attack (that is, every initial offensive 235 c) When a compound attack is made, if the action) that is correctly executed must be opponent finds the blade during one of the parried or completely avoided and the phrase feints, he has the right to riposte. must be followed through – that is to say, 236 d) When a compound attack is made, the coordinated (Cf. 10). opponent has the right to stop hit, but to be In order to judge the correctness of an attack valid the stop hit must precede the conclusion the following points must be considered: of the attack by an interval of fencing time; 1. The simple attack, direct or indirect (Cf. the stop hit must arrive before the attacker has 11), is correctly executed when the begun the final movement of the attack. extending of the arm, with the point threatening the valid surface, precedes the § 3. Judging initiation of the lunge or the fleche. 237 In applying the basic conventions of foil fencing, 2. The compound attack (Cf. 11) is correctly the referee should judge as follows: executed when, with the arm extending in When during a phrase both fencers are touched the presentation of the first feint, the simultaneously, there is either a simultaneous point threatens the valid surface and the action or a double touch. arm is not withdrawn during the succes- The first of these is due to the simultaneous sive actions of the attack and the initia- conception and execution of attacks by both tion of the lunge or the fleche. fencers; in this case the touches exchanged are 3. The attack with advance-lunge or annulled for both fencers even if one of them has advance-fleche is correctly executed when touched a nonvalid surface. the extending of the arm precedes the end The double touch, on the other hand, is the result of the advance and the initiation of the of a faulty action on the part of one of the fencers. lunge or the fleche. Therefore, when there is not a period of fencing 4. A simple or compound action, forward time between the touches: movement or feint executed with a bent 1. Only the fencer who is attacked is counted arm is not considered an attack, but as touched if rather a preparation, which lays itself a) he makes a stop hit into a simple attack; open to the initiation of the offensive or b) instead of parrying, he attempts to avoid offensive/defensive action of the opponent the touch and does not succeed; (Cf. 12). c) after a parry, he makes a momentary To judge the priority of an attack when pause that gives his opponent the right to analyzing the fencing phrase, it should be re-attack (redoublement, remise or noted that: reprise); 5. If the attack is initiated when the oppo- d) during a compound attack, he makes a nent is not “in line,” that is to say with stop hit without being in time; or the arm straight and the point threatening e) having his point “in line” (arm straight the valid surface, it may be executed with and point threatening a valid surface) and a direct thrust, by a disengagement or a being subjected to a beat or a prise de fer coupé, or may even be preceded by a beat that deflects his blade, he attacks or or successful feints obliging the opponent places his point in line again instead of to parry. parrying a direct thrust made by his 6. If the attack is initiated when the oppo- opponent. nent is “in line,” that is to say with the 2. Only the fencer who attacks is counted as arm straight and the point threatening the touched if valid surface, the attacker must first a) he initiates his attack when his opponent deflect the opponent’s blade. Referees is “in line” (arm straight and point must be aware that mere contact is not threatening a valid surface) without considered sufficient to deflect the deflecting the opponent’s weapon opponent’s blade (Cf. 237/2/a). (referees must ensure that mere blade
1995 – 22 Rules for Competitions – USFA contact is not considered as sufficient to deflect the opponent’s blade.); b) he attempts to find the blade, does not succeed and continues the attack; c) during a compound attack in which his opponent finds the blade, he continues his attack while the opponent ripostes immediately; d) during a compound attack, he makes a momentary pause, during which time the opponent makes a stop hit, while the attacker continues his attack; e) during a compound attack, he is stop hit in time before he begins his final action; or f) he makes a touch by a remise, redouble- ment or reprise after his opponent’s parry, which has been followed by a riposte that is immediate, simple, and executed in one period of fencing time without withdraw- ing the arm. 3. The competitors are replaced on guard each time the referee is unable to judge clearly from which side the fault has come when there is a double touch. One of the most difficult cases to judge arises when a stop hit is made and there is doubt as to whether it was made sufficiently in time in relation to the final movement of a compound attack. Generally, in such cases, the double touch occurs through the fault of both fencers concerned, which justifies the referee in replacing them on guard. (The fault of the attacker consists of indecision, slowness of execution or the making of feints that are not sufficiently effective; the fault of the defender lies in delay or slowness in making the stop hit.)
Notes 3 The fact that the referee has said “Fence”, even if some time has thereafter elapsed, does not neces- sarily mean that “the bout has effectively recom- menced,” if the fencers have maintained a passive attitude. For the bout to have effectively recom- menced, the fencers must have actually engaged in a fencing phrase that could have affected the equipment in use.
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 23 PART THREE: EPEE 304 When competitions are judged with electrical scoring apparatus, the strip and its extensions must be entirely covered with metal, a metallic Chapter I – HISTORICAL NOTES mesh or a compound with a metallic base in order The rules for epee drawn up in 1914 clarified and to ensure the nonregistration of touches made on completed all the various epee rules that existed the ground (this is mandatory for official FIE prior to the foundation of the FIE and that had competitions) (Cf. 711). evolved from 1892 both in France and elsewhere, 305 The table on which the scoring machine is placed notably by: must be at least 1 meter from the strip and – the permanent committee named by the opposite the center line; the referee must ensure Société d’Escrime à l’Epée de Paris, l’Acadé- that its isolation is maintained by the auxiliary mie d’Epée; the Société d’Entrainement a personnel as well as the fencers and the spectators. l’Escrime et au Pistolet; and Les Armes de France; – the 1905 Comité International, subject to the Chapter III – EPEE EQUIPMENT laws of each country, regarding the applica- (Weapons – Equipment – Clothing) tion to duelling; (Cf. 16ff) – the Union des Sociétés Francaises de Sport Athlétiques (USFSA); A) WEAPONS (Cf. 22ff) – the Comité National des Sports de France; § 1. General specifications for epees – the Comité Olympique Français; and a) Weight – the organizing committees for the tourna- 306 The total weight of the epee ready for use is less ments held at Nice, the Côte d’Azur, Ostend, than 770 grams. etc. The present rules modify only in detail the b) Length principles adopted in 1914. 307 The maximum total length of the epee is 110 cm. The rules governing epee competitions judged c) The blade with electrical scoring apparatus were adopted in 308 The blade is made of steel, triangular in cross- 1936 and modified by various subsequent Con- section without cutting edges, and must be made gresses. according to the safety standards annexed to the The 1984 Congress adopted the introduction of rules. It is as straight as possible and mounted women’s epee; that of 1987 decided to organize a with the groove uppermost. Any bend must be World Championship in women’s epee beginning uniform and the curve of the blade in all cases less in 1989. than 1 cm; curvature is only permitted in the vertical plane and must be located near the center of the blade (Cf. 24, 30). Chapter II – FIELD OF PLAY (Cf. 14ff) The maximum length of the blade is 90 cm. 301 Epee competitions may be held indoors or out- The maximum width of any of the three sides of doors. Official FIE competitions may only be held the blade is 24 mm. indoors. The blade should have a flexibility equivalent to a 302 The width of the strip is from 1.50 to 2.00 meters bend of 4.5 cm minimum and 7.0 cm maximum and its length is 14 meters (Cf. 15, 38ff, 202 and measured under the following conditions: Fig. I-1, Strip Diagram). 1) The blade is fixed horizontally at a point 70 303 Five lines should be drawn very clearly on the cm from the extremity of the point. strip perpendicular to its length, as follows: 2) A 200 gram weight is suspended 3 cm from – one center line, which must be drawn as a the extremity of the point. broken line across the entire width of the 3) The bend of the blade is measured at the strip. extremity of the point between the non- – two on guard lines located 2 meters on either weighted and the weighted positions (see side of the center line (these must be drawn illustration). across the entire width of the strip). 4) All methods of treating a blade between the – two rear limit lines, which must be drawn guard and the point, either by grinding, filing across the entire width of the strip, at a or otherwise, are forbidden (Cf. 22 and Fig. distance of seven meters from the center line. III-1, Epee Dimension and Flex Test Dia- In addition, the last two meters of the strip grams). before these rear limit lines must be clearly d) The martingale distinguished – if possible by a different color 309 When the epee is not secured to the hand by an of strip – to enable the fencers easily to attachment or by the body cord the use of a identify their positions on the strip (Cf. 15, martingale is mandatory. 38ff and Fig. I-1, Strip Diagram). A fencer who crosses his rear limit with both feet is considered as touched (Cf. 39).
1995 – 24 Rules for Competitions – USFA Figure III-1: Epee Dimension and Flex Test Diagrams
e) The guard (Cf. 26) § 2. Points and tips 310 The guard, which must have a circular edge, must For the electrical epee be able to pass through a cylindrical gauge having 311 1. The electrical point is completed by a tip that a diameter of 13.5 cm and a length of 15 cm, the must conform to the specifications in Part VII blade being parallel to the axis of the cylinder. (Cf. 732). The depth of the guard (the distance between 3. The point should be fixed to the end of the planes B and C) must be between 3.0 and 5.5 cm blade and conform to the specifications in Part (Cf. 24). VII (Cf. 733). The total length between planes A and C must 4. The pressure that must be exerted on the tip in never be greater than 95.5 cm (Cf. 24). order to cause the scoring machine to register Eccentric mounting (the distance between the a touch must be more than 750 grams; this center of the guard and the point where the blade weight must be lifted by the spring of the passes through the guard) is allowed provided it point (Cf. 732). does not exceed 3.5 cm.
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 25 5. The distance that the tip must travel back in Women’s clothing must include, inside the jacket, order to cause the scoring machine to register breast protectors of metal or other rigid material a touch (the “lighting stroke”) must be greater (Cf. 27/4). than 1.0 mm. The further distance that the tip The lower edge of the jacket must overlap the may travel (the “residual travel”) must be less breeches by at least 10 cm when the fencer is in than 0.5 mm. This last requirement is as vital the “on guard” position. as that dictating the length of the “lighting stroke.” The total travel must be greater than Chapter IV – THE CONVENTIONS OF 1.5 mm (Cf. 18, 732). 312 Deleted. EPEE FENCING B) EQUIPMENT A) METHOD OF MAKING TOUCHES 316 The epee is a thrusting weapon only. Attacks with § 1. The mask this weapon must therefore be made with the 313 The mask must not be covered, in whole or in point, and with the point only. part, by material that can cause the point to glance When fencing with nonelectric weapons, any off (Cf. 27). touch made with the point must arrive clearly and The mask must be so shaped that the bib reaches distinctly to be counted (Cf. 29). below the prominences of the collarbones. It is strictly forbidden to press or drag the point of § 2. The body cord the electric weapon on the metallic strip during 314 The conducting wires of the body cord (fencers’ the bout (between “Fence” and “Halt”). It is personal equipment) must be well insulated from equally forbidden, at any time, to straighten the each other, insensitive to humidity, and twisted or weapon on the strip. joined together. The maximum electrical resis- Any breaking of this rule will be penalized tance allowed for each of these conducting wires according to articles 635, 637 and 641 (1st group). from plug to plug is 1 ohm. The body cord has a connecting plug at each end. B) VALID SURFACE At the reel end the three-prong male plug is 317 For epee the valid surface includes the whole of connected to the wire as follows: the fencer’s body, including his clothing and – the prong at 15 mm to whichever wire is most equipment. directly connected to the point; Thus, any touch that arrives counts as a valid – the central prong to the other wire in the epee; touch whatever part of the body (trunk, limbs or and head), the clothing or the equipment it reaches. – the prong at 20 mm to the epee ground circuit (Cf. Fig. III-2, Valid Surface for Epee) and the metallic strip. C) CORPS A CORPS AND FLECHE This plug must conform to the conditions of manufacture and mounting specified in Part VII ATTACKS (Cf. 710, 730). 318 In epee a fencer who either by a fleche attack or by Inside the guard the choice of system is free, but vigorous attacks causes corps à corps, even several the system chosen must comply with the condi- times in succession, (without brutality or violence) does not transgress the basic conventions of tions of article 712. 4 In addition, the prongs of the plug must not on fencing and commits no fault thereby (Cf. 34, 37). any account be permitted to contact the metal of A fencer who intentionally causes corps à corps to the guard. avoid being touched or who jostles his opponent The two wires coming from the tip must be will be penalized as specified in articles 635, 637 protected by two insulating sheaths, one for each and 641 (1st group). wire, from the point where they enter the guard up D) NUMBER OF TOUCHES – to the two insulated plug holes on the plug socket. DURATION OF THE BOUT In no case may uninsulated wires extend beyond the plug connections (Cf. 26, 310, 712, 730). Note: Articles 319 to 321 are no longer in effect. See the comments following Articles 47 and 49, and the FIE C) CLOTHING Temporary Provisions, Appendix B of these Rules. 315 The jacket, which must cover the entire front of 319 In epee, bouts are for five touches, with a duration the trunk, must be completed by a lining in two of six minutes for each bout; for direct elimina- parts, the one making a double layer of material tion, two encounters for five touches each with a for the sleeve down to the elbow of the sword-arm deciding encounter if necessary, or one bout for a and the other covering the flank in the region of given number of touches (Cf. 544f., 555A). the armpit. The collar must have a minimum 320 If, as the result of a double touch, both competitors height of 3 cm. score the maximum number of touches being Clothing must, in all cases, conform to the safety fenced for, they must fence for one or more standards annexed to the rules. additional touches until the expiration of the time limit. Any further double touch is annulled (and
1995 – 26 Rules for Competitions – USFA Figure III-2: Valid Surface for Epee
therefore the fencers hold their ground on the materiality of touches. In no circumstances may strip). The score in such a case will always be the referee declare a competitor to have scored a marked as the maximum number of touches for touch unless the touch has been properly regis- each fencer (for example when the bout is for five tered by the machine (except as specified in the touches, the score is entered on the score sheet as regulations (Cf. 321, 555A) and in the case of D/5 and V/5) (Cf. 321b). penalty touches) (Cf. 72, 626, 709/4). 321 When the allotted time limit expires before the § 2. The annulment of touches bout is competed: 324 1. In arriving at his judgment, the referee will a) in epee for one touch, both competitors are disregard touches that are registered as a counted as touched and a defeat is scored result of actions: against each. – started before the word “Fence” or after b) in epee for several touches: the word “Halt” (Cf. 32); or – if one competitor has scored more touches – caused by the meeting of the points of the than the other, the number of touches epees or by a touch made on the ground required to bring it up to the maximum (when there is no metallic strip, or being fenced for must be added to his outside it) or that are made on any object score, and the same number of touches other than the opponent, including his must be added to his opponent’s score. equipment (Cf. 74, 331). – if both competitors have scored the same 325 A fencer who voluntarily causes the machine to number of touches (or no touches), they register a touch by placing his point on any surface are both counted as having scored the other than that of his opponent will be penalized maximum number of touches being as specified in articles 635, 637 and 641 (1st fenced for and a defeat is scored against group). each, except in direct elimination where If in the final minute of fencing a fencer voluntar- the bout goes on without any limitation of ily causes a touch by placing his point on any the time until there is a result (Cf. 545). surface other than his opponent, he will be Note: The second bullet of part (b) is no longer in penalized as specified in articles 635, 638 and 641 effect; see the comments following Article 49, and the (2nd group). FIE Temporary Provisions, Appendix B of these Rules. 326 2. Further, the referee must take note of possible failure of the electrical equipment and annul E) THE JUDGING OF TOUCHES IN the last touch registered in the following EPEE circumstances: 322 Epee competitions are judged with electrical a) if a touch made on the guard of the scoring apparatus (this is mandatory for official competitor against whom the touch was FIE competitions). registered or on the insulated strip causes I. MATERIALITY OF THE TOUCH the machine to register a touch; b) if a touch properly made by the competi- § 1. Basic principle tor against whom the touch was regis- 323 Only the indications of the scoring machine may tered does not cause the machine to be taken into consideration for judging the register a touch;
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 27 c) if the machine registers an extraneous However, if the safety device prescribed touch on the side of the competitor in article 710 does not work or is missing, against whom the touch was registered; the annulment should be allowed if the for example, after a beat on the blade, by plug at the fencer’s back comes loose. any movements of his opponent, by g) The fact that the epee of a competitor vibrations on the strip that are transmit- shows on the guard, on the blade or ted to the central electrical apparatus or elsewhere large or small areas of insula- as a result of any cause other than a tion formed by oxidation, glue, paint or properly made touch; or any other material on which his oppo- d) if the registering of a touch made by the nent’s touches can cause a touch to be competitor against whom the touch was registered, or that the electric point is registered: badly fixed to the end of the blade so that – does not prevent the registering of a it can be unscrewed or tightened by hand, subsequent touch made by his cannot justify the annulment of touches opponent after a lapse of time greater registered against that competitor. than that required to register a h) The fact that a fencer against whom a double touch; or touch has been registered is found to have – is annulled by a subsequent touch broken his blade justifies the annulment made by his opponent. of that touch unless the breaking of the 327 3. The referee must also apply the following blade clearly occurred after the registra- rules regarding the annulment of touches: tion of the touch. a) Only the last touch preceding the estab- i) When a competitor tears the metallic strip lishment of the fault may be annulled and by a touch made on the ground and, at the then only if it is the competitor against same time, the machine registers a touch whom the touch was registered who is against his opponent, the touch must be placed at a disadvantage by the fault. annulled. b) The failure must be determined by tests j) Whenever, owing to some accidental made immediately after the bout was cause, tests cannot be made, the touch stopped, under the supervision of the must be considered as doubtful and must referee and without any changes to the be annulled (but Cf. 331). equipment in use. k) The referee must pay particular attention c) With these tests, one is only trying to to touches that are not registered or that establish whether there is a material are registered abnormally. Should such possibility of a mistake in the judging as defects be repeated, the referee must ask the result of a fault. The localization of the members of the Commission for this fault in the electrical equipment, Electrical Apparatus and Equipment including that of either of the fencers, is present or an expert technician on duty to unimportant in reaching a decision. verify that the equipment conforms to the d) A fencer who makes any modification in rules. or changes his equipment without being The referee must ensure that nothing is asked by the referee to do so, before a altered either in the competitor’s equip- judgment is pronounced, loses his right to ment or in any of the electrical apparatus the annulment of the touch (Cf. 71/3). before the expert makes the inspection. Similarly, after again coming on guard 328 4. The referee must supervise the condition of and after the bout has effectively recom- the metallic strip; he must not allow the bout menced,5 a fencer cannot claim the to commence or to continue if the metallic annulment of a touch registered against strip has holes in it that might affect the him before the recommencement of the proper registering of touches. (The organizers bout. must make the necessary arrangements to e) It is not necessary, for the annulment of a ensure the rapid repair or replacement of the touch, that the failure found should repeat metallic strips). itself each time a test is made, but it is II. VALIDITY OR PRIORITY OF THE essential that the fault should be estab- TOUCH lished by the referee without the possibil- ity of doubt at least once. § 1. Basic principle f) If the incidents mentioned in article 326 329 In epee, when both competitors are touched, occur as a result of the competitor’s body priority of a touch is allowed only when there is an cord being unplugged (either near the appreciable difference of time between the touches; hand or at the back of the fencer), they if no such difference exists there is a “double cannot justify the annulment of the touch touch”; that is to say a touch is scored for each registered. competitor.
1995 – 28 Rules for Competitions – USFA § 2. Judging 330 The electrical scoring machine registers a double touch if the difference of time between the two touches is less than from 1/20th to 1/25th of a second. 331 When there is a double touch made by two valid touches a touch is scored for each competitor. If a double touch is registered and one touch is valid and the other is not valid (a touch made outside the opponent (Cf. 324) or a touch made after leaving the strip (Cf. 43ff)), only the valid touch is scored. If a double touch is registered by an definite touch and a doubtful touch (failure of the electrical apparatus, disagreement or uncertainty of judges), the fencer who has made the definite touch has the choice of accepting the double touch or having it annulled.
Notes 4 The “fleche ending systematically in corps à corps” referred to in this article must not be confused with the “fleche resulting in a shock that jostles the opponent,” which is considered as an act of voluntary brutality in all three weapons and is punished as such (Cf. 637, 641-1st group). On the other hand, the “fleche that is made by running past the opponent” and without corps à corps is not forbidden; the referee should not call “Halt” too soon, in order not to annul a possible riposte. If when making such a running fleche without touching his opponent the fencer who makes the fleche systematically crosses the lateral boundaries of the strip, he must be punished as specified in article 43. 5 The fact that the referee has said “Fence”, even if some time has thereafter elapsed, does not neces- sarily mean that “the bout has effectively recom- menced,” if the fencers have maintained a passive attitude. For the bout to have effectively recom- menced, the fencers must have actually engaged in a fencing phrase that could have affected the equipment in use (Cf. 327d).
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 29 PART FOUR: SABRE c) Blade 406 The blade is made of steel with an approximately rectangular cross-section. Its maximum length is Chapter I – HISTORICAL NOTES 88 cm; the minimum width of the blade, which The FIE sabre rules include the essential portions must be at the button, is 4 mm; its thickness, also of the rules that were adopted at the Olympic immediately below the button, must be at least 1.2 Games in London in 1908 and in Stockholm in mm (Cf. Fig. IV-1, Sabre Dimensions). 1912. They also conform to the basic principles of The end of the blade must be folded over onto the Ostend rules and the Hungarian rules and were itself or be fashioned in one piece to form a button adopted 12 June 1914 by the FIE Committee for that, viewed end on, must have a square or Sabre assembled in Paris under the chairmanship rectangular cross-section of 4 mm minimum and 6 of Dr. Bela Nagy, President of the Hungarian mm maximum. The maximum dimension must be Fencing Federation, who edited the proposed at most 3 mm from the end of the blade (Cf. Fig. rules. IV-2, Sabre Tip). The present rules merely complete and define The end of the blade may also be made with a those adopted in 1914 and modified by subsequent solid button, which must present the same cross- Congresses. section as the folded button. The rules governing sabre competitions conducted Blades that are too rigid or too whippy are with the aid of electrical scoring apparatus were forbidden. Similarly, sabres having shapes out of adopted in 1988. the ordinary are forbidden. If the blade has a curve, it must be a distinct curve that must be Chapter II – FIELD OF PLAY (Cf. 14ff) continuous, with a bend of less than 4 cm. Blades 401 Sabre competitions are held indoors on strips with sharply bent extremities or that curve in the made of linoleum, cork, rubber, plastic, metal or direction of the cutting edge are forbidden. metallic mesh, or a metal-based material. All methods of treating a blade between the guard 402 The width of the strip is from 1.50 to 2.00 meters and the point, whether by grinding, filing or and its length is 14 meters (Cf. 15, 38ff, 202 and otherwise, are strictly forbidden, as is the sharpen- Fig. I-1, Strip Diagram). ing of its rounded extremity (Cf. 22). 403 Five lines should be drawn very clearly on the The sabre blade must have a flexibility equivalent strip perpendicular to its length, as follows: to a bend of minimum 7 cm and maximum 12 cm – one center line, which must be drawn as a measured in the following way: broken line across the entire width of the 1) The blade is fixed horizontally at a point 70 strip. cm from the point of the blade. – two on guard lines located 2 meters on either 2) A 200 gram weight is hung 1 cm from the side of the center line (these must be drawn point. across the entire width of the strip). 3) The curve is measured at the point of the – two rear limit lines, which must be drawn blade between the weighted and nonweighted across the entire width of the strip, at a positions distance of seven meters from the center line. (Cf. Fig. IV-3, Sabre Flex Test). In addition, the last two meters of the strip d) Guard (Cf. 26) before these rear limit lines must be clearly 407 The guard must be full in shape, made in one distinguished – if possible by a different color piece and externally smooth. It must have a of strip – to enable the fencers easily to convex form that is continuous, without rim or identify their positions on the strip (Cf. 15, holes. 38ff and Fig. I-1, Strip Diagram). A fencer It must be able to pass through a rectangular who crosses his rear limit with both feet is gauge measuring 15 cm by 14 cm in cross-section, considered as touched (Cf. 39). with a length of 15 cm, the blade being parallel to the axis of the gauge. Chapter III – SABRE EQUIPMENT (Cf. Fig. IV-1, Sabre Dimensions). (Weapons – Equipment – Clothing) B) EQUIPMENT AND CLOTHING (Cf. 16ff) 408 1. For sabre, masks must be well padded and have bibs that are sufficiently large and strong A) WEAPONS (Cf. 22ff) (Cf. 27). § 1. General specifications for sabres 2. The wrist or sleeve portion of the glove (the a) Length gauntlet) must not be made of leather that is 404 The maximum total length of the sabre is 105 cm. hardened or of patent leather, or of any other material that might make the blade glance off. b) Weight 3. The elbow guard may be made of hardened 405 The total weight of the sabre ready for use is less leather. than 500 grams. 4. The jacket must cover the valid surface of the trunk, its lower part overlapping the breeches
1995 – 30 Rules for Competitions – USFA Figure IV-1: Sabre Dimensions
Figure IV-2: Sabre Tip
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 31 Figure IV-3: Sabre Flex Test
Figure IV-4: Valid Surface for Sabre
by at least 10 cm when the fencer is in the “on c) Touches through the blade, that is to say those guard” position (Cf. 19, 410). that at the same time touch the sabre of the 5. The jacket must include a lining making a opponent and the vulnerable part [valid double layer of material for the sleeve down to surface], are valid whenever the cutting edge, the elbow of the sword-arm and covering the the back edge or point arrives clearly on the flank in the region of the armpit. valid surface. Clothing must, in all cases, conform to the safety standards annexed to the rules. B) VALID SURFACE § 1. Limitation of the valid surface Chapter IV – THE CONVENTIONS 410 In sabre, only touches that arrive on the surface designated as valid are counted. OF SABRE FENCING The valid surface comprises the entire body above A) METHOD OF MAKING TOUCHES a horizontal line drawn between the top of the 409 Sabre is a weapon for thrusting and cutting with folds formed by the thighs and the trunk of the the edge and the back edge (Cf. 29). fencer when in the “on guard” position (Cf. Fig. a) All touches made with the cutting edge, the IV-4, Valid Surface for Sabre). side or the back edge of the blade are counted 411 A touch that arrives on a nonvalid surface is not as valid touches (edge cuts and back edge counted; it does not stop the fencing phrase and cuts). does not annul subsequent touches. It is forbidden to hit with the guard. Any The referee must penalize a fencer who replaces a touch caused by hitting with the guard will be valid surface with a nonvalid surface, either by annulled and the fencer causing this touch covering or by an abnormal movement. will be penalized as specified in articles 635, For such an offense, the referee will penalize the 637 and 641 (1st group). fencer at fault as specified in articles 635, 637 and b) Touches with the point that graze the valid 641 (1st group). surface or cuts that slip along the opponent’s body (passé touches) do not count. 1995 – 32 Rules for Competitions – USFA C) CORPS A CORPS AND FLECHE machine, if he establishes, by tests made under his ATTACKS personal supervision, before the bout has effec- 412 In sabre, it is forbidden to cause corps à corps tively recommenced6 and without any of the (even without brutality or violence), corps à corps equipment in use having changed (Cf. 71/3 & 5): to avoid a touch, or corps à corps with jostling. – that a touch made by the fencer against whom When such an offense is committed, the referee the touch was awarded is not registered by the will penalize the fencer at fault as specified in machine, articles 635, 637 and 641 (1st group). – that the registration of touches made by the fencer against whom the touch was awarded D) NUMBER OF TOUCHES – does not remain recorded on the machine, DURATION OF A BOUT – that the sabre of the fencer who has scored the touch is not equipped with a sensor, or Note: Articles 413 and 414 are no longer in effect; see the comments following Articles 47 and 49, and the FIE – that a touch can be registered on the fencer Temporary Provisions, Appendix B of these Rules. against whom the touch was awarded without there in fact having been a touch, or by a 413 In sabre, bouts are fenced for five touches with a touch on the weapon or on a nonvalid surface. duration of six minutes per bout; for direct If the sabre of the fencer against whom the touch elimination, either two encounters for five touches was awarded does not conform to the provisions of with a deciding encounter if necessary, or one bout article 428 (insulation of the interior and exterior for a given number of touches (Cf. 554f., 555A). of the guard, of the handle and of the pommel), 414 When the time limit expires before the bout has the touch will not be annulled, even if a touch on been completed: the weapon causes the registration of a touch. a) if one competitor has scored more touches The referee must also apply the following rules: than the other, the number of touches required a) Only the last touch made before the fault is to bring it up to the maximum being fenced established may be annulled. for must be added to his score, and the same b) A fencer who makes any modification in or number of touches must be added to his changes his equipment without being asked by opponent’s score. the referee to do so before the referee has b) if both competitors have scored the same given his decision loses all right to the number of touches, they are counted as having annulment of the touch (Cf. 71/3). both scored one less than the maximum c) If the bout has effectively recommenced,6 a number of touches and they fence for the last competitor cannot claim the annulment of a touch without any time limit. They are touch awarded against him before the recom- replaced on guard in the positions that they mencement of the bout. occupied when the bout was interrupted (Cf. d) The localization of a fault found in the 32). equipment (including the equipment of the c) However, if the referee has had to draw lots to competitors) is of no importance for this give attacking priority (Cf. 423) either before possible annulment. or at the expiration of time, the measures e) It is not necessary that the failure found specified in article 423h, “Scoring of the should repeat itself each time a test is made, Bout”, must be applied. but it is essential that the fault should be E) JUDGING OF TOUCHES IN SABRE established by the referee himself at least once without the possibility of doubt during the I. Materiality of the touch tests made by him or under his supervision. 415 1. In nonelectric sabre, all bouts are judged by a f) The fact that the competitor against whom a jury (Cf. 61ff). For the materiality of touches, touch has been awarded has broken his blade refer to articles 68ff. cannot alone justify the annulment of that 2. If the competitions are conducted with the aid touch. of electrical scoring apparatus (mandatory for g) The referee must be extremely attentive to official FIE competitions), only the indica- touches that are not registered or that are tions of the scoring machine may be taken registered abnormally by the machine. Should into consideration for judging the materiality such defects be repeated, the referee must call of touches. The referee cannot declare a for a member of the Commission for Electri- competitor to have scored a touch unless the cal Apparatus and Equipment or the expert touch has been properly registered by the technician on duty to verify that the equip- machine, except as specified in the rules (Cf. ment conforms to the rules. 414, 555A) and in the case of penalty touches h) Whenever accidental causes make it impos- (Cf. 72, 626, 709/4). sible to carry out tests, the touch will be The referee must, however, take into account considered doubtful (Cf. 69/5). possible failures of the electrical equipment; in i) If touches are registered on both sides of the particular, he must annul a touch that he has just machine, the referee will apply the regulations awarded as a result of a touch registered by the in articles 422 and 423.
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 33 j) In accordance with the general rules (Cf. 32), 4. In no case should a fleche attack end in the referee must stop the bout, even if no corps à corps (Cf. 412). It may be touch is registered by the machine, whenever followed by a reprise of the attack, but fencing becomes confused and he is no longer only after a pause in the action (Cf. 13c). able to analyze the phrase. 5. Continuous forward motion with crossing VALIDITY OR PRIORITY OF THE TOUCH of the feet is forbidden. Any infraction of this rule will result in the penalties set § 1. Preface forth in articles 635, 637, and 641 (1st 416 Whatever method a referee has used to make a group). A touch made by the fencer at decision regarding the materiality of a touch fault will be annulled. On the other hand, (either with the assistance of a jury or with a touch correctly made by the opponent electrical scoring apparatus), he alone then will be counted. decides as to the validity or the priority of the 418 c) In order to judge the correctness of an attack, touch by applying the following basic rules that the following points must be considered: are the conventions applicable to sabre fencing. 1. If the attack is initiated when the oppo- § 2. Regard for the fencing phrase nent has his point “in line” (i.e. with the 417 a) Any attack properly executed (Cf. 10) must be arm straight and the point threatening a parried or completely avoided and the fencing valid surface), the attacker must first phrase must be followed through. deflect the opponent’s weapon. Referees b) The attack is an initial offensive action, must ensure that mere blade contact is not executed by extending the arm and continu- considered as sufficient to deflect the ously threatening the valid surface with the opponent’s blade. point or the cutting edge. 2. If, when attempting to find the oppo- 1. An attack with a lunge is correctly nent’s blade to deflect it, the blade is not executed: found, the right of attack passes to the – as a simple attack (Cf. 11) when the opponent. arm extends during the lunge and the 3. If the attack is commenced when the touch arrives at the latest when the opponent’s blade is not “in line,” the front foot makes contact with the attack may be completed directly, by a strip. disengagement, by a coupé, or even – as a compound attack (Cf. 11) when, preceded by successful feints (Cf. 419) with the arm extending in the correct that oblige the opponent to execute a presentation of the first feint (Cf. parry. 419), the touch arrives at the latest 419 d) In compound attacks the feint must be when the front foot makes contact correctly presented, i.e.: with the strip or immediately 1. A feint with the point: the arm extended afterwards. with the point continuously threatening 2. A fleche attack is correctly executed: the valid surface – as a simple attack (Cf. 11) when the 2. A feint with a cut: the arm extended, the arm extends during the fleche and blade and the arm forming an obtuse when the touch arrives at the latest angle of about 135°, with the cutting edge before the rear foot again makes threatening a valid surface. contact with the strip or as it does so. e) In a compound attack, if the opponent finds – as a compound attack (Cf. 11) when, the blade in one of the feints, he has the right with the arm extending in the correct to riposte. presentation of the first feint (Cf. f) In a compound attack the opponent has the 419), the touch arrives at the latest as right to stop hit, but in order to be valid, the the front foot again makes contact stop hit must precede the last movement of the with the strip. attack by one period of fencing time, i.e. the 3. An attack made with an advance-lunge or stop hit must arrive before the attacker has an advance-fleche is correctly executed: started the last movement of the attack itself. – as a simple attack (Cf. 11) when the 420 g) Attacks by beats on the blade arm extends before the completion of 1. In an attack by beating on the blade, the the advance and when the touch attack is correctly executed and retains its arrives at the latest at the end of the priority when the beat is made on the lunge or the fleche (Cf. 417a&b). foible of the opponent’s blade, i.e. the – as a compound attack (Cf. 11) when, distal two-thirds of the blade. with the arm extending in the correct 2. In an attack by beating on the blade, presentation of the first feint (Cf. when the beat is made on the forte of the 419) during the advance, the touch opponent’s blade, i.e. the proximal one- arrives at the latest at the end of the third of the blade, the attack is badly lunge or the fleche (Cf. 417a&b).
1995 – 34 Rules for Competitions – USFA executed and the beat gives the opponent that deflects his weapon, he attacks or the right to an immediate riposte. places his point in line again instead of 421 h) The parry gives the right to riposte; a simple parrying a direct thrust made by his riposte may be direct or indirect, but in order opponent. to annul any subsequent action by the at- 2. Only the fencer who attacks is counted as tacker, it must be executed immediately, touched if: without any hesitation or pause. a) he initiates his attack when his opponent Against cuts, the object of the parry is to has his point “in line” (arm straight and prevent touches made by the opponent from point threatening a valid surface) without arriving on the intended valid surface, deflecting the opponent’s weapon. therefore: Referees must ensure that mere blade 1. The parry is properly executed when, contact is not considered as sufficient to before the completion of the attack, it deflect the opponent’s blade. prevents the arrival of that attack by b) he attempts to find the blade, does not closing the line in which the attack is to succeed (because he is deceived) and finish. continues the attack; 2. When a parry is properly executed, the c) during a compound attack in which his opponent’s offensive action must be opponent finds the blade, he continues declared parried, and judged as such by the attack while his opponent immedi- the jury, even if, as a result of its flexibil- ately ripostes; ity, the extremity of the opponent’s d) during a compound attack, he withdraws weapon makes contact with the intended his arm or makes a momentary pause, target. during which time the opponent makes a When analyzing the fencing phrase, the referee stop hit or an attack, while the attacker must obtain precise answers from the judges, i.e., continues his own attack; “Yes,” “Yes, but off target,” “No,” or “Abstain.” e) during a compound attack, he is stopped He must consistently refuse to accept answers such one period of fencing time before he as “Badly parried,” “Insufficiently parried,” “Laid makes his final movement; on,” etc. f) he makes a touch by a remise, redouble- § 3. Judging ment or reprise on his opponent’s parry, 422 In applying the basic conventions of sabre fencing, which has been followed by a riposte that the referee must judge as follows: is immediate, simple, and executed in one 1° When during a phrase both fencers are period of fencing time without withdraw- touched simultaneously, there is either a ing the arm; or simultaneous action or a double touch. The g) his fleche attack is not executed in first of these conditions is due to the simulta- accordance with article 417/2&3 or if the neous conception and execution of attacks by continuation of his fleche attack does not both fencers; in this case the touches ex- abide by the regulations specified in changed are annulled for both fencers without article 417/4, and the fencer who is prejudice to the provisions of article 423.. attacked executes an offensive or defen- 2° The double touch (coup double), on the other sive action in the same time. hand, is the result of a faulty action on the 3. The fencers are replaced on guard each part of one of the fencers. time there is a double touch and the referee is Therefore, when there is not an interval of fencing unable to judge clearly from which side the time between the touches: fault has come. 1. Only the fencer who is attacked is counted One of the most difficult cases to judge arises as touched if: when a stop hit is made and there is doubt as a) he makes a stop hit into his opponent’s to whether it was made sufficiently in time in simple attack made from correct fencing relation to the final movement of a compound distance; attack. Generally, in such cases, the double b) instead of parrying, he attempts to evade touch occurs through the fault of both fencers the touch and does not succeed; concerned, which justifies the referee in c) after a successful parry, he makes a replacing them on guard. (The fault of the momentary pause that gives his opponent attacker consists of indecision, slowness of the right to re-attack (redoublement, execution or the making of feints that are not remise or reprise); sufficiently effective; the fault of the defender d) during a compound attack, he makes a lies in delay or slowness in making the stop stop hit without being in time; or hit.) e) having his point “in line” (arm straight § 4. Simultaneous attacks and point threatening a valid surface) and 423 [Double] Touches delivered by simultaneous being subjected to a beat or a prise de fer attacks are not counted.
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 35 Figure IV-5: Metallic Jacket and Valid Surface for Electric Sabre
Chapter V – SPECIAL CONDITIONS by 3 cm metallic tab for the attachment of the THAT MUST BE MET BY THE mask wire crocodile clip. DIFFERENT PARTS OF THE Whatever the means of fastening used, the metallic material must cover a sufficient area to ELECTRICAL SABRE EQUIPMENT ensure that it covers the valid surface in all a) Metallic jacket positions of the fencer. 424 The fencer wears over his jacket a metallic jacket The lamé material must satisfy the conditions whose conductive surface must cover entirely and required for its verification (Cf. 722). without omission the valid surface of the body The sleeves of the metallic jacket must be fixed at located above the horizontal line passing around the wrists by means of an elastic band. There must the body through the tops of the folds formed be a strap passing between the legs of the fencer to between the thighs and the trunk when the fencer hold the jacket in place (Cf. Fig. IV-5, Metallic is in the “on guard” position. Jacket and Valid Surface for Electric Sabre). The conductive surface covers the arms as far as b) Body cord and attachment plugs the wrists. The jacket includes a collar that must 425 Fencers must use a body cord as specified in be at least 3 cm high. The jacket is equipped in the article 217, plugged into the guard by any system middle of the back, beneath the collar, with a 2 cm that satisfies the conditions of manufacture and assembly specified in articles 710, 712 and 717.
1995 – 36 Rules for Competitions – USFA c) Mask Sabres without insulation between the guard and 426 The mesh of the mask must not be insulated and the blade are provisionally allowed. must ensure electrical conductivity. Note: FIE Temporary Provision 4 states: The bib and trim must be entirely covered by a Sabre scoring machines that function without sensors metallic material having the same electrical characteristics as the metallic jacket. The trim may (capteurs) are authorized on a experimental basis for also be made from metal. the 1994-95 season. A definite decision will be made at The electrical resistance between the crocodile clip the 1995 Congress concerning the use of sensors and any point on the mask must be less than 3 during the 1995-96 season. ohms. The 1995 Congress voted to remove the sensor Electrical contact between the metallic jacket and effective October 1, 1996. Tournaments held during the the mask must be ensured by a wire and one or 1995-96 season may be fenced with or without a two crocodile clips. The wire must be attached sensor. either by a crocodile clip or by soldering to the As of March 1996, the USFA has not made a final mesh of the mask and must be between 30 and 40 decision about the use of sensors. cm long. The crocodile clip, which must conform in shape and size to the requirements of article 217, must be soldered to the other end of the wire. Notes d) Glove 6 The fact that the referee has said “Fence”, even if 427 The regulation glove on the sword hand must be some time has thereafter elapsed, does not neces- covered by removable or attached metallic fabric sarily mean that “the bout has effectively recom- on the back of the hand as far as the fingers and menced,” if the fencers have maintained a passive over the entire cuff. attitude. For the bout to have effectively recom- The metallic fabric must be folded over to the menced, the fencers must have actually engaged in inside of the cuff to a depth of at least 5 cm. a fencing phrase that could have affected the To guarantee good contact with the sleeve of the equipment in use. metallic jacket, it is necessary to use an elastic band, a snap or any system capable of ensuring contact and approved by the SEMI Commission. e) Sabre 428 The regulations concerning the dimensions and characteristics of the nonelectric sabre are also valid – without any change – for the electric sabre (Cf. 404ff). Inside the guard there must be a connector into which the body cord may be plugged, whichever system is used. The mounting for the sensor (accelerometer) must be affixed inside the guard and attached firmly to the guard itself. To this mounting must be attached either a four-pin ARCHER (TANDY) socket, type 274001, or a BNC socket. The four pins must be connected to the blade, the guard, the body cord socket and the sensor, according to the attached diagrams (Cf. Fig. IV-6, Circuit Connections for Electric Sabre). The drawing and description that relate to the BNC socket remain as already approved by the SEMI Commission. The interior of the guard must be completely insulated by means of an insulating finish or pad. The exterior of the guard must be insulated for 7 to 8 cm from the pommel. The handle and the pommel must be completely insulated. The guard must be electrically insulated from the blade. The insulation between the guard and the blade that projects from the guard may not be thicker than 0.5 cm and will not be considered as part of the length of the blade.
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 37 Figure IV-6: Circuit Connections for Electric Sabre
1995 – 38 Rules for Competitions – USFA PART FIVE: Committee, and in agreement with the ORGANIZATION OF COMPETITIONS national federation that is organizing the tournament. c) For the Olympic Games, this agreement must Chapter I – COMPETITIONS be made with the organizing committee for 501 Official FIE competitions are organized according the fencing events appointed by the Olympic to special rules (Cf. 570ff). Other international Committee of the country that is organizing tournaments may include individual or team the Games. competitions for women in foil and epee and for d) The members of the bout committee cannot men in all three weapons. These tournaments may act in any other capacity at the tournament, be organized according to rules other than those such as member of the Jury of Appeal, team for official FIE competitions. captain, official delegate of their federation, 502 Official FIE competitions, as well as other competitor, etc. In special circumstances they international tournaments, are open to all competi- may act as referees or as judges. Their tors (individual or team) of countries affiliated functions include the strict and complete with the FIE; every competitor or participant in a organization of the different events and the competition, irrespective of his status, is required obligation to see that the rules are adhered to; to hold a current international license (Cf. Statute they cannot decide on any departure from the 95). rules except when circumstances arise in In particular, a competitor (individual or team) which it is absolutely impossible to apply from a national federation affiliated with the FIE them. may not participate in official FIE competitions or e) For all other international competitions, a other international tournaments if he refuses to bout committee composed of three members, fence against any competitors whatsoever (indi- each representing a different country, one of vidual or team) who have been correctly entered in whom represents the country in which the the event. tournament takes place, may be sufficient. Should this rule be broken, the competitor con- f) For official FIE competitions, when the bout cerned (individual or team) will be immediately committee has to make a judgment in the case disqualified and the FIE Executive Committee will of an appeal against a referee’s decision, the consider whether there are grounds, and to what decisions of the bout committee may be made extent, for penalizing the national federation to by the majority of the members present (there which the disqualified competitor belongs (Cf. must be at least three) at the moment of the Statute 14/j). appeal. § 4. Jury of Appeal (Cf. 618) Chapter II – BODIES RESPONSIBLE a) Nomination FOR ORGANIZATION AND CONTROL 506 At each international competition in which the § 1. The organizing committee (Cf. 616) representatives of two or more countries take part 503 The organizing committee is the group of persons an international Jury of Appeal composed of one responsible for organizing a championship or a representative of each competing nation must be tournament. appointed . At official FIE competitions, each national § 2. The FIE Central Office (Cf. 621) federation must nominate in writing, not later than 504 At the Olympic Games, the World Champion- the day before the start of the competition, its ships, the World Under-20 Championships and the representative to the Jury of Appeal, as well as a World Cadet Championships, the FIE Central substitute capable of replacing him in case of Office controls the activities of the bout committee absence. In this manner, the federations ensure the as described in article 582. presence of one or the other during the entire § 3. The bout committee (Cf. 617) competition. 505 a) The technical organization of competitions is A national federation may modify, in writing, the entrusted to a bout committee (mandatory for designation of its representative and/or substitute official FIE competitions) composed of six if necessary. members for the Olympic Games and the Furthermore, elected members of the FIE Execu- World Championships and five for the World tive Committee who have no official function at Under 20 Championships and the World the competition are ex-officio members of the Jury Cadet Championships. The bout committee of Appeal with voice and vote when they are includes one member from the organizing present at the competition. country; the others must be of different Members cannot act if they are involved person- nationalities (Cf. 581). ally or by reason of their position. No member of b) For official FIE competitions, the bout the Jury of Appeal may be empowered to vote in committee is appointed by the FIE Central the name of an absent colleague. Office, after approval by the Executive
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 39 Members of the Jury of Appeal, with the exception § 6. Auxiliary personnel of the President, may not vote in cases involving 508 Auxiliary personnel who ensure the correct persons of their own nationality. running of competitions include: b) President a) The scorers (who keep the scoresheets on The Jury of Appeal is under the ex-officio presi- which the result of each bout is marked touch dency of the FIE President or the delegate of the by touch, and who make the corresponding FIE Central Office, who will only vote when a entries on the scoreboard) (Cf. 59); deciding vote is required. In the absence of a b) The timekeeper (who controls the duration of delegate of the Central Office, the Jury of Appeal each bout in accordance with articles 45ff and appoints one of its members as its president. 59); In this case the President thus named always votes c) The superintendent of the electrical appara- and, if there is tie vote, his vote is decisive. tus (who concerns himself with the apparatus) c) Jurisdiction (Cf. 60a); The Jury of Appeal may in no circumstances d) The experts (who may be consulted by the decide to waive the rules of the FIE even with the referee or the bout committee regarding all agreement of the parties concerned (Cf. 505d); it matters relating to the electrical apparatus) may only consider complaints and demands that (Cf. 60b); and are submitted to it in accordance with the rules. e) The technicians (who are present to repair any damage that may occur to the electrical d) Meetings equipment) (Cf. 60c). The members of the Jury of Appeal who are present when a complaint is lodged are convened § 7. Inspection of equipment forthwith by the bout committee or when necessary 509 The inspection of the electrical equipment used by by the organizing committee; however, if an the organizers to ensure flawless functioning at urgent decision is not required, the Jury of Appeal official FIE competitions and the inspection of may be convened later. For this purpose, the competitors’ equipment must be supervised by the members of the Jury of Appeal should keep the FIE Commission for Electrical Apparatus and organizing committee informed as to where they Equipment (SEMI Commission). can be found in an emergency when they are In order to effect this supervision, two members of absent. this Commission must be appointed to undertake e) At the Olympic Games this work. However, when a person competent to At the Olympic Games the decisions of the Jury of undertake the inspection of the electrical apparatus Appeal are final, except in the case of a nontech- (and approved for this purpose by the FIE Com- nical dispute regarding which the final decision mission) is present in the organizing country, only rests with the Executive Committee of the Interna- one member of the Commission will be appointed tional Olympic Committee (IOC), which may (Cf. 17, 53, 60b, 508d, 708). intervene on its own responsibility or at the The two delegates each from the SEMI Commis- request of a national Olympic Committee, the FIE sion, the Medical Commission and the Fencing or the organizing committee (Article 39 of the Officials Commission – all designated by the FIE General Rules for the Olympic Games, 1971 Central Office – all have, throughout the duration edition) (Cf. 619). of the competition, the right to intervene with the referee if they consider that the equipment being f) Deposit used in any bout is dangerous. When submitting a complaint to the Jury of Appeal, the appellant must deposit US $80, or its equivalent in another currency, which may be Chapter III – ENTRIES FOR confiscated in whole or in part for the benefit of COMPETITIONS the FIE in the case of a frivolous appeal (Cf. 614). 510 Entries for international competitions must be sent § 5. Juries to the organizers by the competitor’s national 507 All members of a jury must be appointed in federation (or the national federation that granted accordance with the provisions of articles 56ff and the competitor his international license, if the 610. competitor in question is not resident in his native The bout committee may (at any time and without country). having to justify its decision) alter the composition Members of federations affiliated with the FIE are of a jury, in particular for the bouts of a barrage not allowed to participate in competitions orga- (Cf. 610). nized by clubs or persons not affiliated with their In an emergency, the FIE Central Office may national federation unless participation in such appoint the juries for particular competitions. events is especially authorized by said federation. For individual finals comprising six or more competitors, whenever possible there will be two complete juries (or two referees when judging with electrical apparatus). (This is mandatory for official FIE competitions – Cf. 58).
1995 – 40 Rules for Competitions – USFA Note: Articles 514 to 584 have been modified by the FIE Temporary Provisions, Appendix B of these Rules. Chapter IV – PRE-COMPETITION F) by direct elimination with a mixed format of INSPECTIONS one elimination round of pools followed by a (Cf. 17ff) direct elimination table with repechage from 32 to qualify eight fencers for a direct elimi- nation final. Chapter V – TIMETABLE 511 Organizers must see to it that one type of competi- A) BY POOLS tion is completed before beginning another in § 1. The number of fencers per pool order to avoid undue fatigue in the fencers. 515 a) For one touch (epee), pools consist, in 512 The schedule must be arranged in such a way that principle, of a minimum of 10 fencers. no fencer is obliged to participate in events for b) For several touches, pools may consist of a more than twelve hours out of twenty-four. In any lesser number, with a minimum of four. case, no pool or match may begin after midnight, c) However, final pools must comprise at least or at any time when it can be foreseen that there is six fencers. a likelihood that it will end long after midnight. § 2. Composition of pools Whatever format is adopted, the final should start 516 For the first round, the competitors must be at a time that, considering local customs, will seeded. The bout committee alone decides which ensure that the results can be communicated to the competitors are to be seeded, it being understood press, etc., in sufficient time to allow them to be that each national federation must indicate on its published. entry sheet the seeded order of its fencers, for the The organizers must allow sufficient time in the information of the bout committee. schedule for the inspection of competitors’ Seeding on principle should not be thought of only equipment. This requires a minimum of one day in the singular. In each pool there may be first, for each weapon. If events in two weapons are second, third, etc. seeds. begun on the first day of competition, the inspec- From the second round onward, each pool must tion must begin two days earlier. have the same number of competitors, so as to 513 When a tournament includes several individual produce: competitions in immediate succession, those – four quarter-final pools of six fencers, or fencers who have fenced in the finals of one – three pools of six fencers. competition will, unless they have had twenty-four In either case, twelve fencers must qualify to form hours’ rest, be exempted from participation in the two semi-final pools of six fencers, each promot- first round eliminating pools of the succeeding ing three fencers to the finals. competition. 517 In the second qualifying round and in following Those fencers who have actually fenced on a team rounds, the seeding of fencers in each pool will be in the finals of a team competition in one weapon based on an order of classification established will, if they have not had twenty-four hours’ rest, solely from the indicators earned by each fencer in be exempted from participation in the first round the previous round. of eliminating pools of the individual competition 1) The first indicator, serving as the first for the same weapon provided this competition classification, will be obtained by dividing the takes place after the team event. number of victories of each fencer by the number of bouts he has fenced in the pool Chapter VI – INDIVIDUAL (formula V/B); the highest indicator (maxi- COMPETITIONS mum 1.00) being the highest classified (Cf. Fig. V-1, Table of Indicators). Note: Articles 514 to 584 have been modified by the 2) In cases of ties in the first indicator, to FIE Temporary Provisions, Appendix B of these Rules. separate fencers with the same indicator, a 514 Individual competitions may be organized: second indicator will be established by A) by pools. calculating the difference between the number B) by pools with a mixed format of pools of four of touches scored and the number of touches starting with the last 48, 24 or 12 fencers who received by each fencer in the course of the qualify from the elimination pools. pool (formula Touches Scored – Touches C) by direct elimination throughout. Received: TS-TR). D) by direct elimination with a mixed format of In cases of a tie in both indicators, the tied fencers one or more rounds of elimination pools, then will be separated by counting the number of direct elimination with repechage to qualify touches received by each fencer in the pool. The six fencers for a final pool. fencer who has received the fewest touches will be E) by direct elimination with a mixed format of the highest classified. In the case of another tie, one or more rounds of elimination pools, then the position of the tied fencers in the classification a direct elimination table and a repechage will be determined by drawing lots. table to qualify eight fencers for a direct In cases where a fencer, because of his place in the elimination final. order, would be placed in a pool where there is
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 41 Note: Articles 514 to 584 have been modified by the FIE Temporary Provisions, Appendix B of these Rules.
V/B = Ratio of Number of Victories to Number of Bouts Fenced
Indicator NUMBER OF BOUTS FENCED
V/B 123456789101112131415
1 1.000 0.500 0.333 0.250 0.200 0.167 0.143 0.125 0.111 0.100 0.091 0.083 0.077 0.071 0.067
2 1.000 0.667 0.500 0.400 0.333 0.286 0.250 0.222 0.200 0.182 0.167 0.154 0.143 0.133 N 3 1.000 0.750 0.600 0.500 0.429 0.375 0.333 0.300 0.273 0.250 0.231 0.214 0.200 U M 4 1.000 0.800 0.667 0.571 0.500 0.444 0.400 0.364 0.333 0.308 0.286 0.267 B E 5 1.000 0.833 0.714 0.625 0.556 0.500 0.455 0.417 0.385 0.357 0.333 R 6 1.000 0.857 0.750 0.667 0.600 0.545 0.500 0.462 0.429 0.400 O 7 1.000 0.875 0.778 0.700 0.636 0.583 0.538 0.500 0.467 F 8 1.000 0.889 0.800 0.727 0.667 0.615 0.571 0.533 V 9 1.000 0.900 0.818 0.750 0.692 0.643 0.600 I C 10 1.000 0.909 0.833 0.769 0.714 0.667 T O 11 1.000 0.917 0.846 0.786 0.733 R I 12 1.000 0.923 0.857 0.800 E S 13 1.000 0.929 0.867
14 1.000 0.933
15 1.000
Figure V-1: Table of Indicators
already a fencer of the same nationality, he will be § 3. Bout order moved down in the classification order one or 518 The bout order in each pool is shown as follows: more places. This rule will be applied for five Pool of 4 fencers: 1-4 2-3 1-3 2-4 3-4 fencers per country. For other fencers, only 1-2 indicators will be considered. Pool of 5 fencers: 1-2 3-4 5-1 2-3 5-4 In each pool, except for pools of four, the order of 1-3 2-5 4-1 3-5 4-2 fencers in the pool will be decided by lot (however, Pool of 6 fencers: 1-2 4-5 2-3 5-6 3-1 taking into account article 519). 6-4 2-5 1-4 5-3 1-6 4-2 3-6 5-1 Example of the composition of a pool: 3-4 6-2 Starting with the second round, the pools must be Pool of 7 fencers: 1-4 2-5 3-6 7-1 5-4 established based on the classification of fencers 2-3 6-7 5-1 4-3 6-2 5-7 3-1 4-6 by indicators from the previous round and accord- 7-2 3-5 1-6 2-4 7-3 6-5 1-2 4-7 ing to the following example: Pool of 8 fencers: 2-3 1-5 7-4 6-8 1-2 Pool A B C D E 3-4 5-6 8-7 4-1 5-2 8-3 6-7 4-2 Fencers classified #: 12345 8-1 7-5 3-6 2-8 5-4 6-1 3-7 4-8 109876 2-6 3-5 1-7 4-6 8-5 7-2 1-3 11 12 13 14 15 Pool of 9 fencers: 1-9 2-8 3-7 4-6 1-5 20 19 18 17 16 2-9 8-3 7-4 6-5 1-2 9-3 8-4 7-5 21 22 23 24 25 6-1 3-2 9-4 5-8 7-6 3-1 2-4 5-9 30 29 28 27 26 8-6 7-1 4-3 5-2 6-9 8-7 4-1 5-3 6-2 9-7 1-8 4-5 3-6 2-7 9-8
1995 – 42 Rules for Competitions – USFA Note: Articles 514 to 584 have been modified by the FIE Temporary Provisions, Appendix B of these Rules. Pool of 10 fencers: 1-4 6-9 2-5 7-10 3-1 and 4 and the bout order in the pool is as 8-6 4-5 9-10 2-3 7-8 5-1 10-6 4-2 follows: 3-1, 4-2, 1-4, 2-3, 5-6, 1-2, 3-4, 9-7 5-3 10-8 1-2 6-7 3-4 8-9 5-10 1-6, 2-5, 3-6, 4-5, 6-2, 5-1, 6-4, 5-3. 1-6 2-7 3-8 4-9 6-5 10-2 8-1 7-4 e) Example of the order of fencers of the same 9-3 2-6 5-8 4-10 1-9 3-7 8-2 6-4 nationality in a pool of seven: 9-5 10-3 7-1 4-8 2-9 3-6 5-7 1-10 1° When this pool contains among the seven The time allowed for a fencer to rest between two qualified fencers: consecutive bouts in a pool or a barrage is three – two fencers of nationality A, minutes. – two fencers of nationality A and two 519 When a pool contains several fencers from the fencers of nationality B, or same country: – two fencers of nationality A, two a) If they do not form the majority, they must fencers of nationality B and two fence among themselves before meeting fencers of nationality C, competitors of another nationality. the fencers of the same nationality are b) If they form the majority, the bout committee listed on the pool sheet so that they fence may establish a special bout order, departing their first bout against each other while as little as possible from the principle speci- following the bout order specified in fied in article 519a in order to avoid excessive article 518 for a pool of seven. fatigue or exceedingly long delays for the 2° When the pool contains among the seven competitors who form the minority. fencers: c) When competitors classed as “stateless” are – three fencers of nationality A, included in a pool, they must first fence – three fencers of nationality A and against the competitors of their original two fencers of nationality B, or nationality, after the latter have fenced each – three fencers of nationality A, two other, and next against the competitors of the fencers of nationality B and two country that grants them their international fencers of nationality C, fencing license. the three fencers of nationality A must be d) Examples of the order of fencers of the same listed 1, 2 and 3 on the pool sheet; the nationality in a pool of six: two fencers of nationality B, 4 and 5; and 1° When a pool contains among it six the two fencers of nationality C, numbers qualified fencers: 6 and 7. – two fencers of nationality A, or The bout order for the pool of seven – two fencers of nationality A and two detailed in article 518 is no longer valid of nationality B, and must be replaced by the following the fencers are listed on the pool sheet in order: 1-2, 4-5, 6-7, 3-1, 4-7, 2-3, 5-1, 6- such a way that those of the same 2, 3-4, 7-5, 1-6, 4-2, 7-3, 5-6, 1-4, 2-7, 5- nationality fence each other in their first 3, 6-4, 7-1, 2-5, 3-6. bout and the bout order for a pool of six is 520 If a bout in a pool or a team match is interrupted as shown in article 518. by an accidental cause, and this interruption is – two fencers of nationality A, two of likely to be prolonged, the referee may (with the nationality B, and two of nationality consent of the bout committee, or when necessary C, the bout order will be: the organizing committee) alter the bout order in 1-4, 2-5, 3-6, 5-1, 4-2, 3-1, 6-2, 5-3, such a way as to allow the competition to proceed. 6-4, 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, 2-3, 1-6, 4-5. § 4. Classification in pools (elimination rounds) 2° When a pool contains among its six 521 The classification in each pool is determined by qualified fencers: the number of victories obtained by each fencer. If – three fencers of nationality A, there is equality of victories between two or more – three fencers of nationality A and competitors, the classification is determined by the two fencers of nationality B, or TS-TR indicator (the difference between the total – three fencers of nationality A and number of touches scored and the total number of three fencers of nationality B, touches received in the pool). the fencers are listed on the pool sheet in In cases of a tie in both indicators, the fencers will the following way: be separated by counting the touches received – the fencers of nationality A are given during the course of the pool, with the fencer numbers 1, 2 and 3; having received the fewest touches being classified – the fencers of nationality B are given the highest. numbers 4 and 5 or 4, 5 and 6. In cases of an absolute tie between two or more 3° When a pool contains among its six fencers, they will fence a barrage according to the qualified fencers four fencers of the rules of the pool if such a barrage is necessary to nationality A and two others of different determine promotion; if not, they will be classified nationalities, the four fencers of national- as equal. ity A are listed on the pool sheet as 1, 2, 3
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 43 Note: Articles 514 to 584 have been modified by the FIE Temporary Provisions, Appendix B of these Rules. In cases of a tie in victories in a barrage between 3rd bout: unnecessary if C loses the 2nd bout; more than two fencers, the classification will be otherwise, fencer C versus the loser of the determined by applying the formula TS-TR, and 1st bout. touches received, on the touches of the barrage, § 7. Classification in the final pool with the fencer receiving the fewest touches being 524 In the case of a tie in victories in the final pool, classified the highest. classification will be by means of a barrage, but There will be only one barrage, but in the case of only for first place. This barrage will be fenced an absolute tie in victories, TS-TR indicators and according to the rules of the original pool and will touches received in the barrage, the fencers will determine the placing of the fencers who take part fence a further barrage. in it. In epee, in a barrage between only two fencers, There will be only one barrage. In cases of a tie in these two will fence only one bout for five touches. victories in a barrage between more than two There will be no double defeat at the expiration of fencers, the final classification will be determined time; the fencers will fence for a deciding touch. by calculating the TS-TR indicators based on the On the other hand, in a barrage with more than aggregates of the touches scored and of the touches two fencers, the rules of the pool and the preced- received in both the pool and the barrage. Should ing rules must be observed. the two indicators be equal, the fencers will be § 5. Promotion to the next round (qualification) separated according to the number of touches 522 The classification of fencers in each pool deter- received, with the fencer who has received the mines their promotion to the next round, and this fewest touches being placed highest in the classifi- is related to the number of fencers qualifying per cation. If there is an absolute tie in victories, TS- pool. TR indicators and touches received, the fencers a) In epee for one touch, 50% of the competitors will fence a further barrage. in the pool will be promoted to the next For places other than first place, should there be a round. tie in victories, the classification will be deter- b) In all three weapons for bouts of more than mined according to the TS-TR indicator of each of one touch, three or four fencers per pool, the fencers in the final pool. In cases of a tie in depending on the circumstances, will be indicators the fencers will be separated according promoted, and a minimum of 50% of the pool. to the number of touches received. In cases of an In pools of four at least two fencers will be absolute tie, the fencers will be classified as equal, promoted. except in the Olympic Games, where fencers who § 6. Barrages have tied in victories, TS-TR indicators and 523 The classification of fencers in a barrage is touches received must fence a barrage to obtain a determined after the new bouts that they have result without a tie for second and third place. fenced according to the rules of the original pool. In epee, if only two fencers are involved in a In individual competitions, barrages must be barrage for first place they will fence a single bout fenced immediately after the original pool (Cf. for five touches. There will be no double defeat at 507). the time limit; the fencers will fence for a deciding When there are three competitors in a barrage the touch. On the other hand, in a barrage between bout order is as follows: more than two fencers, the rules for the pool and For the first bout lots are drawn, unless there are the rules previously stated will apply. two competitors of the same nationality, etc. (Cf. § 8. A competitor withdrawing from a competi- 519). tion Thereafter one of the following alternatives will a) Fundamental principles apply: 525 1. No one may be disadvantaged by the fact that a) If the barrage is for first place in the final, or he has been unable to fence one or more for promotion where two out of three competi- scheduled bouts. tors can be promoted, the bout order must be: 2. No one may gain an advantage from not 1st bout: fencer A versus fencer B; having met all opponents against whom he 2nd bout: fencer C versus the loser of the 1st would normally have fenced. bout; b) When only one competitor withdraws 3rd bout: fencer C and the winner of the 1st 526 When for any reason whatsoever a competitor bout. (However, if the barrage is for (individual or team) does not complete an event promotion and C has won the 2nd bout, that has commenced, the bout committee must the 3rd bout will not be necessary.) apply the following rules (without prejudice to any b) If the barrage is for promotion and only one disciplinary action that may be taken). competitor can be promoted, the order is the INTRODUCTION following: 527 1° When a competitor (individual or team) 1st bout: fencer A versus fencer B; during an event (pool) does not complete a 2nd bout: fencer C versus the winner of the scheduled bout (or team match) already in 1st bout; progress, if the opponent is leading, that bout
1995 – 44 Rules for Competitions – USFA Note: Articles 514 to 584 have been modified by the FIE Temporary Provisions, Appendix B of these Rules. (or match) will be considered as having been be no barrage when the number of touches scored fenced to the end (all the remaining touches and received is such that, if the event had been that should have been fenced for being finished normally, the fencer in Table B would not credited to the competitor who does not have been ranked above the fencer in Table A even withdraw). In all other cases that bout (or had he won the bout not fenced without receiving match) will be considered as not having been a touch, or would not have been ranked below that fenced. fencer, even had he lost the bout not fenced 528 2° When the competitor who withdraws has without scoring a touch. obtained no victories before his withdrawal, Example: Pool of 6 fencers (Cf. Fig. V-2, he will be considered as not having fenced. Withdrawal Example I) EXAMPLES Table A Indicators 1. Pool of teams: Match between team X and 1st G 4 victories +8 team Z. Total number of bouts = 16. When the 2nd V 3 victories +3 score is: X 9 victories (or even only 6 victo- 3rd X 1 victory - 6 ries), and Z 2 victories, team Z withdraws. Table B The official score of the match will be X 14 1st H 3 victories +3 victories, Z 2 victories. But if in this match 2nd L 1 victory - 4 the score had been 5-5 or 3-2 in favor of Z, In Table B (fencers who have not fenced K, who the withdrawing team, the entire team match withdrew), H is the best placed, with one victory would be annulled. fewer than G, who is best placed in Table A 2. Individual pool for five touches: The bout (fencers who have fenced K, who withdrew). H between A and B has begun; when the score is must therefore fence a barrage with G for first 3-2 in favor of B, A is obliged to withdraw. place. For this bout B will be the winner with the a) If H is the winner of the barrage: 1st H, 2nd official score of 5-2. But if the score had been G, 3rd V. 3-3 or 3-2 in favor of A, who withdrew, the b) If G is winner of the barrage: 1st G, but for bout would be annulled. second place, there must be a barrage between RULE ONE V and H (Cf. 531, Rule Three), who both have 529 When the event (pool) is completely finished the same number of victories. (except for the bouts of the competitor who – If H is the winner of this barrage: 1st G, withdraws) the bout committee will make out two 2nd H, 3rd V. complete classification tables, based on victories, – If V is the winner of this barrage: 1st G, determining exactly the order of the fencers 2nd V, 3rd H. (following the general rules of classification, c) Similarly, for fourth and fifth places there according to the format that the competition is must be a barrage (Cf. 531, Rule Three) following): between L and X. Table A:Classification including only those – If L is the winner he is 4th; X is 5th. competitors who have fenced all the bouts – If X is the winner he is 4th; L is 5th. originally scheduled in the pool. However, barrages between fencers of Tables Table B: Classification including only those A and B who have the same number of competitors who have not fenced the competi- victories are not necessary when the TS-TR tor who has withdrawn. indicator of the fencer in Table B would always be better than that of the fencer in RULE TWO Table A even if he had lost 5-0 the bout not 530 The order of classification between competitors in fenced against the fencer who withdrew. the same table is final. When the fencer in Table A has one victory RULE THREE more than the fencer in Table B, the barrage 1. For the finals will not be necessary if the TS-TR indicator of 531 For first place, a barrage must always be fenced the fencer in Table B would always be lower between the fencer best placed in Table B and the than that of the fencer in Table A even if he fencer best placed in Table A when the latter has had won 5-0 the bout not fenced against the the same number of victories or one more than the fencer who withdrew (Cf. 533/6). fencer in Table B. d) For the classification of K, who withdrew, Successively, for the final determination of each Rule Four applies (Cf. 532) if the withdrawal place (and with the provision that the classifica- was caused by circumstances beyond the tion of each table remains final with regard to the fencer’s control. competitors appearing in that particular table), the 2. For elimination rounds competitor who is – or who remains – best placed Subject to the proviso that the classification of in Table B will fence a barrage with the competitor each table remains unalterable for the competitors who is – or who remains – best placed in Table A in that table, the procedure is as for the final, and whose total victories are equal either to his observing, however, the additional rules listed total or to his total plus one. However, there will below.
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 45 Note: Articles 514 to 584 have been modified by the FIE Temporary Provisions, Appendix B of these Rules.
Withdrawal Example I Pool of 6 fencers, for 5 touches
Table A Table B (fenced all bouts) (fenced all bouts but one) Fencer G X K L V H Vic Def TS TR IND Vic Def TS TR IND G –VVV4V 412416+8 X2–V433 141723-6 K2 3 – V withdraws withdraws V 3V –34 131519-4 LVV4V–4 322320+3 H4V VV– 311916+3
Figure V-2: Withdrawal Example I
Example: the indicators for H; V retains his indicators Table A Indicators from the pool. 1st G 4 victories +8 RULE FOUR 2nd V 3 victories +3 532 A competitor (individual or team) who is obliged 3rd X 1 victory - 6 to withdraw due to some cause beyond his control Table B that has been duly recognized by the referee is 1st H 3 victories +3 entitled to the classification resulting from his 2nd L 1 victory - 4 actual total of points, but should a barrage be 1st case: four fencers are to be promoted to the necessary with one or another of his opponents he next round. loses the benefit of being able to fence the barrage. In this case, G, V and H are already qualified In other cases of withdrawal, he loses the right to and a barrage must be fenced between L and any classification whatever, without prejudice to X to determine the 4th fencer to qualify. possible disciplinary penalties. If L is the winner he qualifies, but L has c) When more than one competitor does not fenced one match fewer because he has not complete a competition (Cf. 525) met K, who withdrew. To equalize his (Cf. Fig. V-3, Withdrawal Example II) classification by indicators, which must be 533 In order to apply the fundamental principles to established between the fencers promoted to these circumstances (Cf. 525ff), the following provide the basis for the setting up the pools corollaries are added to the previous rules: for the next round, L’s V/B and TS-TR 1. When more than one competitor does not indicators must take into account the barrage complete a pool, the bout committee will, after fenced against X. the pool is completely finished, prepare the If X is the winner he qualifies, but retains his following classification tables (the classifica- indicators from the pool, as he has fenced all tion order within each table being final): his bouts. Table A:including only those competitors who To regularize the classification of H equally, a have fenced all the bouts originally barrage is fenced between V and H, who both scheduled in the pool; have the same number of victories. Table B: including only those competitors who Whatever the result of this barrage: have fenced all the bouts originally V retains his indicators from the pool, as scheduled less one; he fenced all his bouts. Table C: including only those competitors who For H, who has fenced one bout fewer have fenced all the bouts originally because of K’s withdrawal, the V/B and scheduled less two; TS-TR indicators must take into account And so on as required. the result of this barrage, as in the case of 2. Every fencer who has not fenced one or more L. bouts must fence a barrage with the fencers 2nd case: three fencers are to be promoted to who are best placed in the other tables with the next round. whom he might have had the same number In this case, G, V and H qualify but a barrage (or a greater number) of victories (except in must be fenced between V and H in order to those cases where, as specified in Rule Three equalize the classification by indicators. The above, the number of touches received and results of the barrage will be included only in scored makes the barrage unnecessary (based on the TS-TR indicator)).
1995 – 46 Rules for Competitions – USFA Note: Articles 514 to 584 have been modified by the FIE Temporary Provisions, Appendix B of these Rules.
Withdrawal Example II Pool of 9 fencers, for 5 touches
Victories/TS/TR/IND Fencer L M N O P Q R S T Table A Table B Table C L – V V 3 V withdraws M 3 – V V V 1 V 4 4V/28/22/+6 N 3 – V 3 3 V 4 2V/23/25/-2 O 0 4 – V V V 0 3V/19/22/-3 P 2 – V 3 V withdraws Q V 3 V 3 4 – V V 2 4V/32/31/+1 R VV2V2–33 3V/25/27/-2 S 11223V–V 2V/19/32/-13 T2 V V V V V 4 – 5V/31/23/+8
Figure V-3: Withdrawal Example II
3. To determine first place in the final pool, each where the number of touches received and table having its definitive classification, it is scored by the different competitors concerned first ascertained which of the fencers best is such that this barrage is unnecessary). placed in each table has the greatest number 5. For promotion from elimination rounds, after of actual victories. determining which competitors are certain of Should he be a fencer in Table A, he must promotion and which are certain to be fence a barrage with the fencer best placed in eliminated, a barrage will be fenced between Table B who has the same number of victo- all the competitors who might, according to ries, or one fewer, than he, and with the the number of their actual or possible victo- fencer best placed in Table C who has the ries, be promoted to the next round. same number of victories, or one or two fewer, 6. In order to equalize the classification by and with the fencer best placed in Table D indicators of the fencers from Table B, and who has the same number of victories or one, possibly from Table C, who have not met the two or three fewer, etc. fencer or fencers who withdrew from the Should he be a fencer in Table B, he must competition with the classification of the fence a barrage with the fencer best placed in fencers from Table A (who have fenced all Table C who has the same number of victo- their bouts and as a result retain their original ries, or one fewer, than he, and with the indicators), the bout committee will take the fencer best placed in Table D who has the barrage into account when calculating the same number of victories, or one or two fewer, indicators of the fencers in Tables B and C. etc. In the final, in the case of a withdrawal, the Should he be a fencer in Table C, he must classification will be made in the same way. fence a barrage with the fencer best placed in Table D who has the same number of victo- B) BY POOLS WITH A MIXED FORMAT ries, or one fewer, than he, and with the OF POOLS OF FOUR fencer in Table B who has only one victory § 1. Format of the competition fewer. 534 The bout committee will organize one or two And so on as required. qualifying rounds of pools, depending on the The competitor who wins this barrage will be number of fencers entered, to arrive: placed first in the final; the classification – at either 48 fencers relative to each other of the other competitors – or 24 fencers. in the barrage will be determined by the In either case several rounds of pools of four results of the barrage as fenced, but other fencers will be held, with two fencers promoted competitors may be placed within their per pool, to arrive at a final of six fencers. rankings. In the first elimination round, the pools may be 4. For the other places in the final, every fencer composed of from four to seven fencers, depending who has not fenced one or more bouts in the on the number of fencers entered; it should be final will fence a barrage with those fencers in noted that the size of the pools may only differ by the other tables with whom he might have tied one fencer. on number of victories (except in those cases
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 47 Note: Articles 514 to 584 have been modified by the FIE Temporary Provisions, Appendix B of these Rules. From the second round onward, the pools must all each fencer in the pool and in the barrage will be have the same number of fencers, either six for taken into account. elimination rounds or four for the pools from 48 or There will only be one barrage, but in the case of a 24 fencers. further tie in victories, TS-TR indicators and The bouts will be fenced for five touches with a touches received, the fencers must fence a further time limit of six minutes (Cf. 45). barrage. § 2. Composition of pools In epee for a barrage between only two fencers, 535 In the first round, the competitors must be seeded. they will fence only one bout for five touches. The bout committee alone decides which competi- There will be no double defeat at the expiration of tors are to be seeded, it being understood that each time; the fencers will fence for a deciding touch. national federation must indicate on the entry On the other hand, in a barrage between more form the ranked order of its fencers, to inform the than two fencers, the rules for the pool and the bout committee. previous rules will be observed. In the second and subsequent rounds, fencers are b) Pools of four placed in pools according to a classification based 538 In each pool, it is the number of victories obtained only on the indicators obtained by each fencer in by each fencer that establishes the classification. the preceding round (Cf. 517, definition of In the case of tie in victories between two or more indicators). fencers, their classification will be decided by a In the case of equality of the two indicators barrage. between two or more fencers, their placement in In a barrage between more than two fencers, if the classification table is decided by drawing lots. there is a further tie in victories, they will be When a fencer would be placed, because of his separated by means of the TS-TR indicators and classification, in a pool where there is already a touches received determined by adding together fencer of the same nationality, he moves down in their touches scored in the pool and in the barrage the order of classification by one or more places. and their touches received in the pool and in the In placing fencers in quarter- and semi-final pools barrage. on the basis of their indicators, should there be There will only be one barrage, but if there is a fencers with the same indicators, the bout commit- further absolute tie in victories, TS-TR indicators tee, instead of drawing lots to decide the order, and touches received, the fencers will fence an must take into account the nationality of the additional barrage. fencers. In epee for pools of four, there will be no double 536 From the second round onward, following the defeat at the expiration of time. If at the end of order of classification of fencers promoted and regulation time the two fencers have scored the noting the number of pools that the round should same number of touches, or none at all, they will have: each be assumed to have scored the maximum Pools A B C D E F number of touches (five). They will then fence for Fencers classified #: 123456 one further deciding touch without any time limit, 12 11 10 9 8 7 annulling double touches. 13 14 15 16 17 18 The pool sheet will show a result of V/5 and D/5, 24 23 22 21 20 19 as appropriate (Cf. 320). §3. Classification in the pools § 4. Promotion to the next round a) Elimination rounds 539 The classification of the fencers in each pool 537 In each pool, the number of victories earned by decides their promotion to the next round, consis- each fencer establishes the classification. tent with the number of fencers being promoted In the case of a tie in victories between two or per pool. more fencers, their TS-TR indicators determine This number will be three or four, as appropriate, their classification in the pool. In the case of a tie with a minimum of 50% of the fencers in the pool in TS-TR indicators, the number of touches promoted; in pools of four at least two fencers are received by each fencer during the pool will be promoted. taken into account. In the pools of four, in the case of a tie in victories, When two or more fencers tie exactly on victories, promotion to the next round must be decided by TS-TR indicators and touches received, they will fencing a barrage (Cf. 538). fence a barrage following the rules of the pool if § 5. Bout order in the pool such a barrage is necessary to decide promotion; if 540 For the elimination rounds and the final pool of not, they will be considered as having tied. six, the bout order is as specified in article 518 In the case of a tie in victories in a barrage (however, Cf. 519). between more than two fencers, their classification 1. In official FIE competitions, the pools of four will be obtained by the TS-TR indicators based on will be fenced on one single strip and the bout the aggregates of the touches scored and of the order will be as follows: touches received in both the pool and the barrage. 1st bout: 1-4 (except when article 519 applies) In cases of a tie in TS-TR, the touches received by
1995 – 48 Rules for Competitions – USFA Note: Articles 514 to 584 have been modified by the FIE Temporary Provisions, Appendix B of these Rules. 2nd bout: 2-3 (except when article 519 from the TS-TR indicators and the touches applies) received for each of the fencers in the pool. In the Three minutes’ rest (Cf. 518) case of a tie in these indicators, the fencers will be 3rd bout: The winner of the 1st bout versus ranked as tied, except in the Olympic Games the loser of the 2nd bout where, for second and third places, a barrage will 4th bout: The winner of the 2nd bout versus be fenced if victories and TS-TR indicators and the loser of the 1st bout touches received are equal, so as to ensure a result Three minutes’ rest (Cf. 518) without a tie for second and third places. If at the end of the first four bouts, only one of In epee, if a barrage for first place is between only the four fencers already has two victories, his two fencers, they will fence one bout for five 3rd bout must be fenced before the other touches. There will not be a double defeat at the remaining match. expiration of time; rather, the competitors will 5th bout: The fencer already having won two fence for a deciding touch. On the other hand, in a victories versus the fencer he has not yet barrage between more than two fencers, the rules met of the pool and the previous rules will apply. 6th bout: The remaining bout If at the end of the first four bouts, the four C) BY DIRECT ELIMINATION FOR fencers each have one victory, the order of the THE ENTIRE COMPETITION last two bouts will be decided by drawing lots § 1. Application (Cf. 519). 542 The general provisions of the FIE Rules for 2. In other competitions the organizers may, as Competitions apply without any exception, insofar their choice, apply the following rules for the as they do not conflict with those special rules pools of four: The pools of four may be run in contained in this Part VIC. series of two bouts fenced simultaneously on § 2. Organization of the competition two strips. To allow fencers in one pool to 543 The bout committee will organize a first elimina- have a rest in between bouts, the bouts of a tion round taking account of seeding and nation- second pool may be fenced, alternating with alities and exempting from this first round the those of the first pool, on the same two strips. number of competitors (the “top seeds”) necessary The bout order will be as follows: in order to preserve, after this first round, a 1st series: 1-4 and 2-3, simultaneously on two number of competitors that is a power of two (i.e. strips 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, etc.). 2nd series: The winners against the losers, The formula used to arrive at E, the number of simultaneously on two strips. competitors exempt from the first round is: 3rd series: The two remaining bouts. E = 2N – P If at the end of the first two series of bouts where P is the number of competitors entered, and only one of the four fencers already has two N the number of competitors who must be pre- victories, his third bout must be fenced before served to arrive at the direct elimination table (i.e. the other bout in the third series. 4 or 8 or 16 or 32, etc.). In the pools of four, in both cases (1) and (2) The direct elimination table is then drawn up above, the third series must be fenced out even observing the principles of seeding; those seeded if a result has already been obtained, to will be placed in the table in order of merit at establish the indicators, and to calculate positions 1, 2, 3, 4, etc., according to the sample points for the seeding of teams. tables in article 556. § 6. Final pool: classification § 3. Format of bouts and number of touches 541 In the case of a tie in victories in the final pool, 544 For all three weapons each individual bout the classification will be determined by a barrage, consists either of a given number of touches or of but only for first place. This barrage will be fenced two encounters for five effective touches with a in accordance with the regulations for the pool and deciding encounter if required. Bouts consisting of will determine the classification of the fencers who two or three encounters are considered equivalent take part in it. to a single bout for ten effective touches, and any There will only be one barrage. In the case of a warnings are valid for the whole bout. further tie in victories in a barrage between more than two fencers, the classification will be deter- § 4. Duration of bouts (Cf. 45) mined by applying the formula TS-TR and touches 545 Six minutes per encounter. The encounters are received, taking into account the touches in both separated by a mandatory rest period of thirty the pool and the barrage. If there should be a seconds and the fencers change sides. further absolute tie in victories, TS-TR and If in any of the three encounters the fencers are touches received, the fencers will fence a further tied at the expiration of regulation time, the barrage. encounter will be extended without time limit until For positions other than first place, the classifica- a decision is reached. tion when victories are equal will be established Bouts for ten touches are ten minutes long; bouts for eight touches are eight minutes long.
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 49 Note: Articles 514 to 584 have been modified by the FIE Temporary Provisions, Appendix B of these Rules.
§ 5. Withdrawal of a fencer circumstances, but must be at least 50% of the 546 When, for any reason whatever, a fencer cannot fencers comprising the pool. fence, or cannot complete a bout, his opponent is The composition of the first round pools is the declared winner of that bout. responsibility of the bout committee, which § 6. Bout order must, however, take into account the World 547 Bouts are always called in the order of the table, Cup ranking of the fencers as of the date of starting at the top and finishing at the bottom. the World Championships and, if necessary, of In order to save time, the organizers may run any information provided by the team cap- several bouts simultaneously on different strips, tains. The order of the fencers on the pool but the fencers must always be called in the same sheet will be established by drawing lots, order. except when article 519 is applied where there A rest period of ten minutes must always be are fencers of the same nationality. allowed between two consecutive bouts of the same Pools must be fenced through the last bout, fencer. even if the qualifying results have already been determined. § 7. Classification b) From the second round onward, all pools must 548 The general classification is obtained as follows: have the same number of fencers. 1st, the winner of the final bout For the composition of the pools in the second 2nd, the loser of the final bout and subsequent rounds, the bout committee When it is not necessary to separate the remaining will only take into account the order of competitors, the two losers of the semi-final classification established by the V/B and TS- matches tie for 3rd; the four losers of the quarter- TR indicators obtained by each fencer in the final matches tie for 5th; the eight losers of the preceding round. In cases of equality in both eighth-final matches tie for 9th, etc. indicators, the fencer who has received the When it is necessary to divide them, there will be fewest touches will be placed highest. In a a barrage between the losers of the semi-final case of absolute equality, lots will be drawn matches to determine 3rd and 4th places, a barrage between the equal fencers. by direct elimination between the losers of the As in the first round, the second and subse- quarter-final matches to determine 5th, 6th, 7th quent round pools will qualify three or four and 8th places, etc. fencers according to the circumstances, but at D) MIXED FORMAT – ELIMINATION any rate 50% of the fencers. The pools must POOLS AND DIRECT ELIMINATION be fenced through the last bout. Example of pool composition: see article 517. TABLE WITH REPECHAGE, TO For the bout order, see articles 518 and 519. QUALIFY SIX FENCERS TO A FINAL POOL § 3. Classification in the pools: promotion 551 In each pool it is the number of victories obtained § 1. Rules: format of the competition by each fencer that decides the classification. 549 The competition is fenced with a mixed format of In cases of equality of victories between two or one, two, or several rounds of elimination pools more fencers, their TS-TR indicators decide their and a direct elimination table with repechage, to classification. In cases of equality of TS-TR qualify six fencers for a final pool. indicators, account will be taken of the number of The direct elimination table of 64, 32 or 16 fencers touches received, with the fencer having received qualifies four fencers for the final; the repechage the fewest touches being the highest placed. table qualifies two. In cases of absolute equality in victories, TS-TR In the elimination pools and the final the bouts are indicators and touches received between two or fenced for five touches for both men and women – more fencers, they will fence a barrage, following the actual fencing time is six minutes (Cf. 45). the normal rules for the pool, if this barrage is In the direct elimination and repechage tables the necessary to decide promotion; if not, they will be bouts are fenced for ten touches, ten minutes classified as tied. maximum for men, and for eight touches, eight In a barrage between more than two fencers, if minutes maximum for women (Cf. 45). there is again equality of victories, they will be § 2. Composition of the pools: elimination classified according to the TS-TR indicators rounds obtained by taking the difference between the total 550 a) The first elimination round will be fenced in number of touches scored and the total number of pools; each pool may have five or six fencers, touches received in both the pool and the barrage. according to the number of entries, it being In cases of equality of TS-TR indicators, the understood that there may not be a difference touches received by the fencers in both the pool of more than one fencer between any of the and the barrage will be taken into account, with pools. the fencer having received the fewest touches The number of fencers who qualify from each being the highest placed. pool will be three or four according to the
1995 – 50 Rules for Competitions – USFA Note: Articles 514 to 584 have been modified by the FIE Temporary Provisions, Appendix B of these Rules. There will be only one barrage, but in the case of from the same country qualify for the direct another absolute equality in the barrage, the elimination table. fencers will fence a further barrage. Moreover, this exception will not be observed In epee for a barrage between only two fencers, for the last few fencers to qualify if the they will fence a single bout for five touches. number of places available does not allow its There will be no double defeat “at time;” the application. fencers will fence for one more touch until there is i) In the case of a withdrawal before the direct a result, with no time limit. On the other hand, in elimination table has been established, it is a barrage between more than two fencers, the rules the lowest place in the table (i.e. the 32nd, the for the pool and the preceding rules will be 16th or the 8th) which must remain empty. observed. § 5. Organization of the bouts – format It is the classification of the fencers in each pool 553 All the bouts of the direct elimination table will be that determines their promotion to the next round, fenced in the order of the table, beginning at the according to the number of fencers promoted from top and finishing at the bottom, up to Table C, each pool. qualifying four fencers for the final pool of six. § 4. Direct elimination table – composition The bouts will be for: 552 The promoted fencers’ results from the last two – ten touches, time limit ten minutes per bout, rounds of qualifying pools will be written on a for the men (Cf. 45). table that summarizes the number of bouts fenced, – eight touches, time limit eight minutes per bouts won, touches scored and touches received by bout, for the women (Cf. 45). each fencer in each of those rounds. A rest period of five minutes must always be A seeding order of the 32 or 16 qualified fencers allowed between two bouts of the same fencer. will be established in the following way: § 6. Repechage – principles, tables, organiza- a) The results written on the summary table will tion of the bouts be added to determine the two necessary 554 The principles of the repechage are as follows: indicators. – A fencer cannot be eliminated until he has b) The first indicator, for the initial classifica- been beaten twice, once in the direct elimina- tion, will be obtained by dividing the number tion table and once in the repechage table. of victories by the number of bouts fenced – All bouts in the repechage table are fenced (formula V/B). with the same format as in the direct elimina- c) The fencer with the highest indicator (maxi- tion table. mum 1.00) will be seeded first. – The repechage table for a direct elimination d) In cases of equality in this first indicator, a table of 32 fencers consists of five rounds to second indicator (formula TS-TR, the differ- determine the two fencers who, with the four ence between the total number of touches fencers qualified from the quarter-finals of the scored and the total number of touches direct elimination table, will compete in the received) will be established to separate tied final pool of six fencers. fencers. a) In the first round of repechage (Table D), the e) In cases of equality of both the V/B and TS- sixteen fencers who were beaten in the first TR indicators, the fencer having received the round of direct elimination (Table A) will fewest touches will be the highest seed. fence in the order established by the latter. f) In cases of absolute ties between two or more b) The second round of repechage (Table E) will fencers, their places in the classification table be a table of sixteen fencers: the eight fencers will be decided by drawing lots. beaten in the second round of direct elimina- g) The bout committee will then establish the tion (Table B), who will be placed in numbers direct elimination table by placing, as defined 1-8, and the eight winners from the first in article 556, each fencer at the position in round of repechage (Table D), who will be which his seeding order puts him, with the placed in numbers 9-16. best classified fencer being put as No. 1, the The allotting of numbers 1-8 and 9-16 is done next best as No. 2, and so on. with respect to the original classification order h) A single exception will be made for fencers of of the 32 fencers who qualified. However, in the same nationality. In principle, they should drawing up this table of sixteen fencers, the not be in the same quarter of the table. Each bout committee must not take into account the time the application of the rules puts two nationality of the fencers but rather the fencers of the same nationality in the same possibility of bouts between the same two quarter of the table, whichever of the fencers fencers being repeated. has the lower classification will drop to the In a repechage table of 16 fencers, if once the next position in the order that will put him table has been drawn up according to article into a different quarter of the table. 554b above, one or more bouts that have This rule will not apply to the fifth fencer already been fenced would be repeated, the from a country, in cases where five fencers fencer in such a bout who has the lower
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 51 Note: Articles 514 to 584 have been modified by the FIE Temporary Provisions, Appendix B of these Rules. seeding number in his quarter of the table In cases of equality of victories in the final pool, must change places with the fencer who, in classification will be established by means of a the opposite quarter of the table, has the barrage for first place only. The barrage will be nearest seeding number to his. fenced following the rules of the pool, and will The changes will be made between quarter A determine the placing of the fencers who take part of the table on the one hand and quarter B of in it. the table on the other, and in the same way There will be only one barrage. In cases of equality between quarter C and quarter D (Cf. 568). of victories in barrages between more than two The bouts in this second round (Table E) will fencers, the final order will be obtained by taking be fenced in the order of the table to qualify into account the TS-TR indicators (the difference eight fencers. between the total number of touches given and the c) The third round of repechage (Table F) total number received in both the pool and the consists of the eight winners of the second barrage). In cases of equality of TS-TR indicators, round of repechage, who will fence among the fencers will be separated by taking into themselves, in the order of the table, to qualify account the number of touches received in both the four fencers for the fourth round of repechage. pool and the barrage. Should there be absolute d) The fourth round of repechage (Table G) will equality of victories, TS-TR indicators and touches be a table of eight fencers consisting of the received, the fencers will fence a further barrage. four losers from the direct elimination For places other than first place, where there are quarter-finals (Table C), who will be numbers equal victories, the order will be established 1-4 in Table G according to their original according to the TS-TR indicators for each of the classifications, and the four winners from the fencers in the final pool; in cases of equality of third round of repechage (Table F), who will TS-TR indicators, placing will be according to the be numbers 5-8, also according to their number of touches received. original classification order. In cases of equality of victories, TS-TR indicators The bout committee must not take into and touches received, the fencers will be classified account the nationality of the fencers in as tied except in the Olympic Games, where a establishing Table G of 8 fencers, but rather barrage must be fenced between fencers tied on the possibility of bouts being repeated, and victories, TS-TR indicators and touches received must apply the same system of exchanging in order to get an order without ties for second and fencers as in the table for 16 fencers where third places. repeating bouts occur (Cf. 554b). However, in In epee, if a barrage for first place is between only a case where such an exchange would result two fencers, they will fence a single bout for five in the repetition of another bout, there will not touches. There will be no double defeat “at time;” be an exchange. the fencers will continue for one more touch until The bouts in Table G (fourth round of there is a result. On the other hand, in a barrage repechage) will be fenced in the order of the between more than two fencers, the rules of the table to qualify four fencers. pool and the preceding rules will be observed. e) The fifth and final round of repechage (Table H) will consist of two bouts between the E) MIXED FORMAT – ELIMINATION winners of Table G to identify the two fencers POOLS AND A DIRECT who, with the four winners of the quarter- ELIMINATION TABLE WITH final round of the direct elimination table, will REPECHAGE TO QUALIFY EIGHT fence in the final pool of six fencers. FENCERS FOR A FINAL RUN BY f) In the case of withdrawal before the establish- DIRECT ELIMINATION ment of the repechage table, it is the lowest Articles 549 and 553 are valid for this format, as place in the table that remains empty. well as article 554 with the following modification § 7. Final pool: classification to the end of article 554: omit paragraphs e and f. 555 The order of the fencers on the pool sheet is 554 The bouts of Table G (4th round of repechage) will determined by drawing lots by the bout committee, A be fenced in the order of the table to qualify four who must, however, apply the exceptions set down fencers who, with the four fencers qualifying in in article 519 for FIE competitions. Table C of the direct elimination, will compete in The rules for the final pool of six fencers are as the direct elimination final of eight fencers. follows: In the case of a withdrawal before the repechage Each fencer in the pool will fence all the other table has been established, it will be the lowest fencers in the pool in bouts for five touches, place in the table that must remain empty. fencing time six minutes (Cf. 45), for men as well The direct elimination final of eight fencers as for women, in the bout order specified in 555 The order of the direct elimination table of eight articles 518 and 519, whichever applies. A fencers is determined on the one hand for the four In epee, double defeats “at time” will be counted. fencers qualifying through the direct elimination Table C, who occupy places 1 to 4, based on the
1995 – 52 Rules for Competitions – USFA Note: Articles 514 to 584 have been modified by the FIE Temporary Provisions, Appendix B of these Rules. initial seeding order in the summary table of – fencers defeated in the first round of the finals classification of qualified fencers; and on the other place 5th through 8th hand, for the four fencers qualifying through – fencers defeated in Tables D, E, F and G are repechage Table G, who occupy places 5 to 8, classified as follows: based on the initial seeding order. – the four fencers defeated in Table G place In the establishment of this table, no account will 9th through 12th be taken either of the nationality of fencers or of – in a tableau of 16, the four fencers the repetition of bouts. defeated in Table D place 13th through In the case of a withdrawal before this table has 16th been established, it will be the lowest place in the – in a tableau of 32, the four fencers table that must remain empty. defeated in Table F place 13th through The bouts will be fenced according to the order of 16th the table of eight, starting at the top, on a single – the eight fencers defeated in Table E strip. place 17th through 24th Each bout will be fenced: – the eight fencers defeated in Table D – for men, for ten touches, with a difference of place 25th through 32nd two touches up to twelve touches, and with a Each group of fencers eliminated in the first time limit of ten minutes. round of the finals (5th – 8th) and in Tables – for women, for eight touches, with a differ- D, E, F and G is classified within itself ence of two touches up to ten touches, and according to the original places of the fencers with a time limit of eight minutes. in the direct elimination tableau of 32 (or 16) All bouts must be fenced to a result; there will be fencers. no double defeats in epee. If a fencer withdraws during the course of the Should the bout not be completed when regulation direct elimination or repechage table, he retains time has expired: his place as set forth above, as if he had lost his a) For all three weapons, if one of the fencers remaining bouts). has scored more touches than the other, the The classification of fencers eliminated in the number of touches required to reach the elimination rounds will be determined, round by maximum is added to his score, and the same round, according to their indicators (V/B, TS-TR, number of touches is added to the score of his TR) (Cf. 517). opponent. In the case of ties in indicators, the fencers will be For foil and sabre: classified as tied. b) If the two fencers are tied, they are both assumed to have scored one less than the F) MIXED FORMAT – ELIMINATION maximum number of touches, and they fence POOLS AND DIRECT ELIMINATION for a deciding touch without time limit. They TABLE WITH REPECHAGE FROM are placed on guard at the place they occupied 32 QUALIFYING 8 FENCERS FOR A when the bout was stopped (Cf. 226 and 414). DIRECT ELIMINATION FINAL For epee: 555 One round of elimination pools and a direct c) If the two fencers are tied, they are both C elimination table with repechage from 32 to assumed to have scored the maximum number qualify eight fencers for a direct elimination final. of touches, and they fence for a deciding touch For the Olympic Games; the Senior, Junior and without time limit, double touches being Cadet World Championships; and category “A” annulled (Cf. 321). events; the competitions are to be run according to The bout to decide 3rd and 4th places will be the following format: fenced before the last bout of the final. Articles 550 to 553, 554 except for paragraph e), For 5th, 6th, 7th and 8th places, the fencers 554A, 555A and 555B are applicable, subject to will be classified according to their initial the following modifications: indicators. 1) Competition format Ten minutes rest must always be allowed The competitions are organized according to a between two bouts of the same fencer. mixed format: Classification of fencers – one round of pools; 555 At official FIE competitions, all fencers must be – direct elimination without repechage to B ranked and all necessary bouts contested: 32 fencers; – first and second places are determined by the – direct elimination with repechage from final bout 32 to 8; – at the World Championships, two third places – final of 8 by direct elimination, consisting are awarded to those defeated in the two bouts of 4 fencers from the direct elimination for promotion to the final bout. At the and 4 fencers from the repechage. Olympic Games, a bout will be held for third place (bronze medal)
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 53 Note: Articles 514 to 584 have been modified by the FIE Temporary Provisions, Appendix B of these Rules. 2) Elimination round – There will be a rest of 30 seconds Article 550a applies, except for the first two between each encounter. sentences. In the present format, pools will – All warnings and/or penalties are valid have six fencers. If the number of entrants is for the entire bout (2 or 3 encounters). not divisible by six, the bout committee may – There will be no double defeats in epee; form pools of five, chosen at random. In no each encounter must be fenced to a result. case may the number of fencers be four from – Fencers will not change sides between the start. encounters except in exceptional circum- In exceptional cases, to avoid having two stances (for example, sunshine on the successive flights of pools, the bout committee strip). may form pools of six and (or) seven fencers. – Hand judges change sides after each These pools will be chosen at random. encounter and in the middle of the third – In category “A” events, the organizing encounter. country may add the required number of 6) Repechage fencers of its own nationality to balance Articles 554 and 554A are modified as follows: the pools. – A new table of 32 is not created; the – Bouts are fenced for 5 touches, 6 minutes. initial table continues, carried out A fencer who withdraws or is excluded is through the repechage. deleted from the pool, and his results are – The repechage will only start with 32 annulled as if he had not competed. fencers, regardless of the size of the 3) Classification – qualification initial direct elimination table. Article 551 is modified as follows: – In exceptional cases, the repechage may – A single general classification is estab- start with 16 fencers if the number of lished for all of the participants in all of entries is too small to allow the formation the pools (V/B, TS-TR, TR). of a table of 32. – Before the beginning of the competition, 7) Final of eight the bout committee will determine and Article 555A is modified as follows: announce the number of fencers to qualify – Paragraph 5: bouts are fenced according for the direct elimination table. This to 555C/5. number must be at least 2/3 and at most – Point c), 2nd paragraph: There will not 4/5 of the participants (from 20% to 33 1/ be a bout for third place except at the 3% eliminated). Olympic Games, where the bout for third – In the case of an absolute tie between the place (bronze medal) is always fenced. last qualifiers, there will not be a barrage, and those who are tied will all qualify, even if they are in excess of the antici- pated number (Cf. 552f). 4) Direct elimination table – composition Cf. article 552, completed as follows: – The table of 32, 64, 128 or 256 may be incomplete. – The classification of the fencers will be based on the single preliminary round of pools. – The application of the principle of protection of fencers of the same national- ity (Cf. 552h) cannot place a fencer in a position lower than the total number of qualified fencers. However, in an incomplete table, a fencer who has earned a bye based on his or her classifi- cation may not be moved to a position in the table wherein he or she will face an opponent. 5) Progression of bouts in the direct elimina- tion phase Article 553 is modified as follows: – Bouts are fenced for the best two of three encounters, each for five touches with a margin of two touches to a maximum of six, in six minutes.
1995 – 54 Rules for Competitions – USFA Note: Articles 514 to 584 have been modified by the FIE Temporary Provisions, Appendix B of these Rules. 8) Sample elimination tables: 64 Fencers 556 N.B. – On these tables the numbers 1, 2, 3, etc., 1 indicate the places to be assigned in order of merit 64 33 according to the established seeding. 32 8 Fencers 17 1 48 8 49 5 16 4 9 3 56 6 41 7 24 2 25 40 16 Fencers 1 57 16 8 9 5 8 60 5 37 12 28 13 21 4 44 3 53 14 12 11 13 6 52 7 45 10 20 15 29 2 36 61
32 Fencers 4 1 3 32 62 17 35 16 30 9 19 24 46 25 51 8 14 5 11 28 54 21 43 12 22 13 27 20 38 29 59 4 6 3 7 30 58 19 39 14 26 11 23 22 42 27 55 6 10 7 15 26 50 23 47 10 18 15 31 18 34 31 63 2 2 Figure V-4: Sample DE Tables (8, 16, 32, 64)
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 55 Note: Articles 514 to 584 have been modified by the FIE Temporary Provisions, Appendix B of these Rules.
Direct Elimination Table of 32 Fencers with Repechage
Table D Table A Table B Table C Finalists 1 Spock VUL (1-4) Stonn Spock 32 Stonn VUL Stonn Spock 17 Quark FER Riker Quark 32 Fencers Qualified: (13)16 Riker TER Spock Initial Seeding 9Kruge KLI 1 Spock VUL Kruge Q (25)24 Q QCO 2 Sarek VUL Kruge Mendak (26)25 Krako IOT 3 McCoy TER Krako Mendak 4 Sabin BET 8 Mendak ROM 5Troi BET (6)5 Worf KLI 6 Worf KLI Nimoy Worf (27)28 Nimoy SAG 7Kirk TER Opaka Worf 8 Mendak ROM 21 Opaka BAJ Opaka Picard 9Kruge KLI 12 Picard TER 10 Shatner SAG Tomalak (14)13 Data AND 11 Frakes SAG Gareth Data 12 Picard TER 20 Gareth CAR Gareth Tomalak 13 Riker TER 29 Tomalak ROM 14 Data AND Sabin Tomalak 4 Sabin BET 15 Okmyx IOT 16 Ayelborne ORG 3 McCoy TER McCoy Kira 17 Quark FER 30 Kira BAJ 18 Johan SCA Trefayne Kira 19 Trefayne ORG 19 Trefayne ORG Trefayne Okmyx 20 Gareth CAR (15)14 Okmyx IOT Frakes 21 Opaka BAJ 11 Frakes SAG Odan Frakes 22 Odan TRI 22 Odan TRI 23 Hugh BOR Troi Frakes (28)27 Ruk AND 24 Koloth KLI Troi Ruk 25 Q QCO (5)6 Troi BET 26 Krako IOT 7Kirk TER 27 Nimoy SAG Koloth Kirk (24)26 Koloth KLI 28 Ruk AND Koloth Shatner 29 Tomalak ROM 23 Hugh BOR Hugh Shatner 30 Kira BAJ 10 Shatner SAG 31 Nog FER Sarek (16)15 Ayelborne ORG 32 Stonn VUL Johan Ayelborne 18 Johan SCA Johan Sarek 31 Nog FER Nog Sarek 2 Sarek VUL
Figure V-5: Sample Direct Elimination with Repechage from 32
1995 – 56 Rules for Competitions – USFA Note: Articles 514 to 584 have been modified by the FIE Temporary Provisions, Appendix B of these Rules.
Table E Table F 1Kirk SAG Kirk 16 Stonn VUL Seeding into Table E Kirk (10)9 Kruge KLI Losers of B (1-8) Ruk 8Ruk AND 1Kirk (7) 2 Picard (12) 5Ayelborne ORG Ayelborne 3 Data (14) 12 Trefayne ORG 4 Okmyx (15) Okmyx 13 Gareth CAR 5 Ayelborne (16) Okmyx 6 Quark (17) 4 Okmyx IOT
7 Q (25) 3Data AND 8 Ruk (28) Data 14 Opaka BAJ Winners of D (9-16) Data 9Troi (5) 11 Johan SCA Johan 10 Kruge (9) 6 Quark FER 11 Johan (18) 7Q QCO 12 Trefayne (19) Troi 13 Gareth (20) (9)10 Troi BET Troi 14 Opaka (21) 15 Koloth KLI 15 Koloth (24) Koloth 2Picard TER 16 Stonn (32) Table G Finalists (5-8) 1Worf KLI Seeding into Table G Worf 8 Okmyx IOT Losers of C (1-4) 1Worf (6) (6)5 Kirk TER Kira 2 Mendak (8) 4Kira BAJ 3 Shatner (10) 3 Shatner SAG 4 Kira (30) Shatner Winners of F (5-8) (5)6 Troi BET
5Troi (5) 7Data AND 6Kirk (7) Data 2 Mendak ROM 7 Data (14) 8 Okmyx (15) FINALS Table of 8 Fencers Final Placings 1 Spock VUL Spock 1 Spock VUL 8Kira BAJ 2Data AND Spock 5 Worf KLI 3 Worf KLI Worf Winner: 4Frakes SAG 4 Tomalak ROM Spock 5 Sarek VUL 3Frakes SAG 6 Shatner SAG Frakes 6 Shatner SAG 7 Tomalak ROM Data 8Kira BAJ 7Data AND Data 2 Sarek VUL 3rd Place: Worf Worf Figure V-5 (continued) Frakes Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 57 Note: Articles 514 to 584 have been modified by the FIE Temporary Provisions, Appendix B of these Rules.
Explanations of sample DE Table: seeding by assembling all the facts that may Table A enable them to determine the relative strengths of To avoid placing two fencers of the same national- the teams (Cf. 565ff). ity in the same quarter of the table, the rule in The bouts are fenced in such a way that each article 552h is applied. fencer of one team meets the fencers of the Examples: opposing team in a prearranged order. TROI (#5) is moved to #6 because there is already The fencers of the two teams will meet each other a fencer of her nationality (SABIN) in the second in the following order: quarter of the table; WORF (#6) takes the place of 3-8 6-3 1-6 5-1 TROI. 4-6 8-1 3-5 6-2 RIKER (#13) is moved several places (finally he is 1-7 5-4 2-8 7-3 placed in #16 in the first quarter of the table) as he 2-5 7-2 4-7 8-4 cannot occupy places 13, 14 or 15 because of the § 2. The composition of teams fencers PICARD (second quarter of the table), 558 At official FIE competitions, teams will consist of MCCOY (third quarter of the table) and KIRK four or five fencers, of whom four are designated (fourth quarter of the table), who are all of his by the team captain for each match. nationality. After lots have been drawn to decide which team Similarly, KOLOTH (#24) is moved to #26 in the is placed on the upper part of the match score- fourth quarter of the table because of the presence sheet, each team captain will provide, in writing, of his countryman KRUGE in the first quarter. Q the order in which his fencers are entered on the (#25) and KRAKO (#26) are each moved up one scoresheet, as well as the name of the team captain place. for this match. NIMOY (#27) is moved to #28 to avoid being in A team cannot begin a match if fewer than four the same quarter as his countryman FRAKES. members are present and ready to fence. However, RUK moves up to #27. a team may complete a match that it has already The bout between countrymen SPOCK and started with fewer than four fencers. STONN is unavoidable because STONN is the last Exceptionally, if as a result of an accident or some in the table and cannot be moved. cause outside their control that has been duly Table E recognized, a team is forced to present itself at the For establishing Table E no account is taken of the start of a match with fewer than four fencers, the fencers’ nationalities, but rather the repetition of bout committee or the organizing committee may bouts (Cf. 554b). authorize a fencer properly entered for another This is why TREFAYNE and AYELBORNE weapon to complete the team. (ORG) must meet each other. On the other hand, § 3. Classification of teams TROI (#9) must be placed in the adjacent number a) Match between two teams (#10) in the corresponding table because she has 559 The winner of the match is the team whose already fenced against RUK (see Table A). members have obtained more individual victories. KRUGE (#10) takes place #9. In the case of a tie in individual victories, the Table G winner is the team that has received fewer touches. As in Table E, repetition of bouts must again be If there is equality of individual victories and of avoided. Because of this KIRK (#6), who has touches received, the match is “drawn.” already met SHATNER (see Table B) is moved to Each victory of one team over another is worth the adjacent number (#5) in the corresponding two points. quarter of the table. Each drawn match is worth one point to each of the two teams. Finals Each defeat counts zero. In establishing the final table, no account is taken of either the fencers’ nationalities (FRAKES/3 – b) Classification of several teams in the same SHATNER/6) or bouts that are repeated (WORF/5 pool – TOMALAK/4). 560 1st case In each match the bouts will stop as soon as a result has been obtained. Chapter VII – TEAM COMPETITIONS For foil and sabre, account will only be taken of § 1. Organization formats the number of victories necessary, i.e. normally 557 Team competitions may be organized: nine victories in a match between teams of four. A. by pools of teams throughout; For epee this number may be reduced to eight, B. by pools of teams: one round of elimination seven or six victories, etc., depending on the pools followed by a table of direct elimination number of double defeats registered during the of eight or sixteen teams through to the final; match. However, the match should be stopped C. by direct elimination throughout. sooner if the difference in touches is such that the When establishing the pools for a team competi- losing team cannot catch up with the other; a bout tion (Cf. 6), the bout committee will determine the in progress must be completed.
1995 – 58 Rules for Competitions – USFA Note: Articles 514 to 584 have been modified by the FIE Temporary Provisions, Appendix B of these Rules. The general classification is obtained by adding up obtained up to the time of his withdrawal are the points, the winning team being the one with allowed to stand, and defeats will be counted the highest total, and so on. against him for each of the subsequent bouts in In the case of a tie in points between two or more which he should have taken part; that is to say that teams in the same pool, they will be ranked all of his pending opponents will be considered to between themselves according to the difference have beaten him, without having received a single between the number of individual victories and touch from him. individual defeats added up for the entire pool: V- The fencer who withdraws will retain the benefit D indicator. of the victories he has won before his withdrawal, In the case of a tie in V-D indicators, the TS-TR as well as the touches scored and received in the indicator for all the touches scored and received by bout in which he withdraws. each team throughout the pool will be applied. In However, if a member of a team is obliged to the case of a tie in TS-TR indicators, the team that withdraw during a match, either as the result of an has received the fewest touches will be classified accident, or by reason of some cause beyond his above the others). control that has been duly recognized by the If the number of points, the V-D indicators, the referee, his team captain may ask the permission TS-TR indicators and the number of touches of the bout committee, or failing them, of the received are the same for two or more teams, they organizing committee, to put in a substitute to will be classified as tied. continue the match at the point where the fencer If it is necessary to differentiate between the teams, who was so obliged withdrew, even during a bout for promotion to the next round or for the overall in progress. classification, there will be one single barrage However, a fencer who is thus replaced cannot bout, fenced immediately after the original event, take his place in the team back during the same between fencers nominated by the captains of the match. teams from among those who have just fenced in In the course of a match, the team captain may ask the team pool. to replace a fencer with the substitute named 561 2nd case before the start of the match (Cf. 558). In these matches, all possible bouts (Cf. 557) must This substitution may only be made at the end of a be fenced. bout. The fencer who has been replaced may not The general classification is obtained by adding up fence again during that match, even in the case of the points, the winning team being the one with an accident or unavoidable circumstances in order the highest total, and so on. to replace a fencer on the strip. The announcement In the case of a tie in points between two or more that a fencer is to be substituted, which must be teams in the same pool, they will be ranked made by the referee to the bout committee and to between themselves by applying the V-D indicator the opposing team captain, must be made at the for the total of all the victories and all the bouts in latest before the beginning of the bout preceding the entire pool. the next bout of the fencer who is to be replaced. In the case of a tie in the V-D indicators, the TS- If an accident occurs in the bout that follows the TR indicator for the total of all the touches scored request for a substitution, the team captain may and received by each team in the pool will be annul that request. If the captain of the opposing applied. In the case of a tie in the TS-TR indica- team has also requested a substitution, this tors, the team that has received the fewest touches substitution may be implemented or canceled. will be classified above the others). d) A team not completing an event In the case of an absolute tie between two or more 563 I. When for any reason whatever a team does teams they will be classified as tied. not complete an event that has begun, the bout If it is necessary to differentiate between the teams committee will apply the rules specified for a for promotion to the next round or for overall competitor who does not complete an event in classification, there will be one single barrage an individual competition, each team being bout, fenced immediately after the original event, considered in its entirety as being a single between fencers nominated by the captains of the competitor (Cf. 525ff). teams from among those who have just fenced in II. When a team withdraws, it is considered: the team pool. 1° as not completing the event that has When the classification in a pool has been begun, if it has already fenced against conclusively determined, the bout committee is another team in the pool (Cf. 527ff). allowed to stop the matches (or even the bouts) 2° as not competing at all in the event, if that remain to be fenced and therefore to halt the this is its first match in the pool. match with the result decided. c) Withdrawal of a member of a team during a match 562 When a member of a team withdraws during the course of a match – without prejudice to possible disciplinary penalties – the results that he has
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 59 Note: Articles 514 to 584 have been modified by the FIE Temporary Provisions, Appendix B of these Rules. A) TEAM EVENTS ENTIRELY BY will receive four points more than the last DIRECT ELIMINATION placed fencer in the individual competition. a) Basic principle – In the case of a tie in points for two or more 564 When organizing team competitions by direct teams, priority will be given to the team with elimination, the applicable rules are the same as the fencer best placed in the individual those for individual competitions, each team being competition. If the best fencers from the teams considered as an individual (Cf. 542, 548, 556). were tied, the classification of the second best fencer of each team will decide. b) Format for matches In the case of the exclusion of a fencer from the Each match will be fenced so that each fencer of individual event, the points obtained by that fencer one team will fence each member of the other remain valid for the classification of his team in team, following the bout order shown in article the team event on the condition that he is actually 557. taking part in that event. c) Barrages The team whose point total is lowest is seeded No. When two teams cannot be separated (same 1, with the other teams following in reverse order number of individual victories and same number to their number of points. of touches), the result will be determined by a The pools for the teams are set up in the same way single barrage bout that will be fenced to a result as those for individual events, the teams taking the between one fencer from each team selected by the No. 1 place in each pool becoming thus first seeds, team captains from the fencers who have just the teams taking the No. 2 place in each pool participated in this team match. The team whose becoming the second seeds, etc., even if the member wins the barrage will win the match. number of teams is not divisible by the number of B) TEAM COMPETITIONS WITH A pools. MIXEDFORMAT: POOLS AND If the results of the pools confirm this seeding, the same order of seeding will be used by the bout DIRECT ELIMINATION committee to place the qualifying teams into the 565 At official FIE competitions, World Champion- direct elimination table. ships and Olympic Games, the team events will be If the results of the pools do not confirm the fenced with at least one round of pools, followed seeding, the bout committee will modify the by a direct elimination table. The following rules classification established by the pool results by specify: observing the following rules: – the way the pools of teams must be composed, After classifying the teams in each pool of teams, taking into account the results obtained in the according to the results of each pool: individual events by the fencers entered to a) the winning teams from each pool take the top compete in the team events; half of the classification; – the way the direct elimination table must be b) the teams placing second in each pool take the prepared, taking into account the preliminary lower half of the classification. round of pools; and In each half of the classification, the teams will, – the rules for classification of the teams as a for the establishment of the direct elimination result of fencing the direct elimination table. table, be ranked according to their initial seeding. § 1. Composition of the pools Example – 16 teams 566 The pools are established by the bout committee, ABCD taking into account when seeding the teams the 1234 results achieved by the fencers representing each 8765 nation in the individual event, considering at a 9101112 maximum the results of the four best fencers of 16 15 14 13 each nation who are entered to fence the team Results of the pools of teams: event, according to the following system (initial ABCD seeding). 1 10 6 5 Placed 1st § 2. Point system 8 2 11 4 Placed 2nd 567 Points are calculated in the following way: 97312Placed 3rd – Each fencer will receive the number of points The classification established for the direct equal to his place in the individual competi- elimination table will be: tion. Before calculating these points, all 1. Team No. 1 5. Team No. 2 fencers who are not participating in the team 2. Team No. 5 6. Team No. 4 competition will be removed from the indi- 3. Team No. 6 7. Team No. 8 vidual rankings and only the rankings of the 4. Team No. 10 8. Team No. 11 fencers participating in the team competition § 3. Direct elimination table will be counted. 568 When the classification of the teams has been – Fencers who did not take part in the indi- established according to the results of the round of vidual competition but who are part of a team elimination pools, the bout committee will put the
1995 – 60 Rules for Competitions – USFA Note: Articles 514 to 584 have been modified by the FIE Temporary Provisions, Appendix B of these Rules.
1 A 8
5 D 4
3 C 6
7 B 2
Figure V-6: Team Direct Elimination Table
teams that have qualified into the direct elimina- the event, and must, in all circumstances, be tion table according to the following systems of finished before the match to decide first place. drawing lots: For those teams that still have to be classified 1 Between the teams seeded 1st and 2nd. below 6th place the classification will be estab- 2 Between the teams seeded 3rd and 4th. lished as follows: 3 Between the teams seeded 5th and 6th. – The two teams beaten in the matches to 4 Between the teams seeded 7th and 8th. qualify for 5th and 6th places will meet to 5 Between the teams seeded 9th and 10th. decide 7th and 8th places. 6 Between the teams seeded 11th and 12th. For the other teams, the classification will be 7 Between the teams seeded 13th and 14th. established as follows: 8 Between the teams seeded 15th and 16th. – For teams eliminated in the various direct But in no circumstances may two teams from the elimination tables: according to their initial same pool meet each other again in the first round seeding (Cf. 566) of direct elimination. In any case where the rules – For teams eliminated in the rounds of pools, do not allow this rule to be applied, the teams 1) by taking into account the number of placed second in their pools will be exchanged points for team victories in the pools. either between quarters A and B of the table, or However, where there have been pools of between quarters C and D (Cf. Fig. V-6, Team three teams and pools of four teams, the Direct Elimination Table). bout committee will not take into account Additional matches by direct elimination neces- the matches with the team placed fourth sary for the establishment of the table will always in the pool, so as to equalize the classifi- be considered as the first round of direct elimina- cation in pools of three and four teams. tion. In consequence, for matches in this first 2) In cases of a tie in points, the teams will round only, the exchanges defined above will take be classified between themselves accord- place in order to avoid having teams who have ing to the V-D and TS-TR indicators and already met in the elimination pools meet again in touches received. These indicators will be the first round of direct elimination. calculated on the total of victories, § 4. Classification of places other than 1st and defeats, touches given and touches 2nd received in all the matches in the pools. 569 A supplementary match between the two teams If there are several pools of four teams, the beaten in the semi-finals will enable the determi- order of teams classified fourth in these pools nation of 3rd and 4th places. This match must be will be established relative to each other by fenced before the match to determine first place. taking into account the team points and the V- Further, if needed, 5th and 6th places may be D and TS-TR indicators and touches received. determined as follows: – The four teams eliminated in the quarter-final of the direct elimination table will meet each other in two matches, following the order of the table. – The winners of these two matches will then meet to determine 5th and 6th places. These three matches will be fenced on a strip other than that to be used for the semi-finals and final of
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 61 Note: Articles 514 to 584 have been modified by the FIE Temporary Provisions, Appendix B of these Rules. Chapter VIII B) TEAM CHAMPIONSHIPS SPECIAL RULES FOR § 1. Simultaneity WORLD CHAMPIONSHIPS,7 574 The country that has been entrusted with the HISTORICAL NOTES organization of the individual championships must, at the same time and place, hold team A) INDIVIDUAL CHAMPIONSHIPS championships in all three weapons for men and 8 § 1. Annual championships in foil and epee for women. 570 In accordance with the decisions made at the § 2. Entries Congresses at Antwerp (1920, 1939), the Hague 575 Entries are restricted to one team in each weapon (1927), Amsterdam (1928), Brussels (1937, 1947), from each country, each team to consist of four or Madrid (1962) and Paris (1987), official indi- five fencers of the same nationality from whom vidual championships in foil, epee and sabre for four are selected by the team captain for each men and in foil and epee for women, called World match. Championships (called European Championships In the Olympic Games each country has the right until 1936) are held annually under the auspices of to enter 20 competitors; that is, three teams of five the FIE, in principle between 1 July and 15 men and one team of five women. August. Countries that wish to enter a team in one or more The fencing events at the Olympic Games are events at the World Championships must so under the direction of the FIE and constitute the inform the national federation that is undertaking World Championships in Olympic years. the organization one and a half months before the § 2. Candidature championships begin, and confirm eight days 571 Each year, requests to undertake the organization before the same date the number of teams that can of the World Championships to be held the actually be counted on to participate. following year or years must be submitted to the At least one month before the championships, the FIE Central Office to be placed on the agenda of organizers must advise the FIE Central Office of the annual Ordinary Congress, within the time the countries that have entered for each team limit specified in the Book of Statutes for the event. submission of items for the agenda (Cf. Book of § 3. Format (Cf. 565ff) Statutes). 576 Team events will be fenced with a minimum of The Congress will decide to which national one round of pools, followed by a direct elimina- federation the organization of these champion- tion table. ships will be entrusted for the following year or The bout committee establishes the pools, taking years, and at the same time fix the date and place into account when seeding them the results of the where they will be held. individual fencers of each nation in the corre- Should the annual Ordinary Congress be unable to sponding individual event, considering as a decide which national federation will organize the maximum the results of the best four fencers of World Championships for the ensuing year each country entered to fence in the team event, because no candidate has come forward, the FIE according to the point system defined in articles Central Office may itself decide which national 567. federation will organize these championships if it Article 567 also details the effect the results the receives one or more candidates after the Congress team pools may have on the seeding, if these has taken place. results do not confirm the seeding established by The FIE Central Office will have the same powers the bout committee. should the national federation to which the Articles 568 and 569 regulate the establishment of organization was entrusted by the Congress the direct elimination table according to the results withdraw. of the team pools and specify how the direct § 3. Entries elimination matches must be fenced. 572 Entries are limited to five fencers of the same C) CONDITIONS COMMON TO TEAM nationality for each event (three for the Olympic AND INDIVIDUAL CHAMPIONSHIPS Games). § 1. Participants § 4. Competition format 577 The World Championships are open to all national 573 The individual championships will take place by federations affiliated with the FIE. direct elimination with the mixed format of one or more rounds of elimination pools and a direct § 2. Entries elimination table with repechage in order to 578 Countries that wish to send their fencers to the qualify eight fencers to compete in a final by direct World Championships in either individual or team elimination. The rules of this format are detailed events must so advise the national federation that in articles 549 to 556 of the present rules. undertakes the organization one and a half months before the start of the events.
1995 – 62 Rules for Competitions – USFA Note: Articles 514 to 584 have been modified by the FIE Temporary Provisions, Appendix B of these Rules. Eight days before the events begin each participat- attend all meetings of the bout committee; the bout ing federation must confirm with the organizers committee is required to give him notice of such the number and names of the participants in each meetings. event. Changes of names due to reasons beyond Similarly, if the Jury of Appeal is assembled, its their control may only be made at the latest 24 ex-officio president is the FIE President or a hours before the start of each event (Cf. 535, 587). delegate of the FIE Central Office (in their For the Senior and Junior-Cadet World Champion- absence, Cf. 506b). ships, a delegation must be accompanied by the § 7. Number of touches following minimum number of referees: 583 The number of touches for all three weapons is as 1 to 4 fencers: 0 referees follows: 5 to 12 fencers: 1 referee – For pools: 13 to 20 fencers: 2 referees Women (foil and epee): five effective touches 21 to 30 fencers: 3 referees Men (three weapons): five effective touches These referees will be at the disposal of the bout – For direct elimination: committee throughout the competitions. Women (foil and epee): two encounters of five Nations taking part in the Olympic Games, the touches with a third deciding encounter if World Championships and the World Under-20 necessary, or one bout of eight touches. Championships who do not send the number of Men (three weapons): two encounters of five international referees specified above are required touches with a third deciding encounter if to send to the organizing federation the sum of necessary, or one bout of ten touches (Cf. 2,500 French francs for each missing referee three 45). months before the beginning of the events, and to advise the FIE Central Office accordingly. With D) THE OLYMPIC GAMES this money the FIE will invite substitute referees. 584 The rules for the World Championships are A federation that fails to observe the time limit for applicable to the Olympic Games except for points remitting the required sum or for informing the contrary to the Olympic Rules.9 FIE will be obliged to pay double the specified amount to the FIE Central Office before the end of Chapter IX the calendar year following the passed time limit, on pain of suspension, in accordance with article RULES FOR THE WORLD 85 of the Statutes. UNDER-20 CHAMPIONSHIPS10 1) This rule will be applied unless there is cause § 1. Frequency of the World Under-20 Champi- beyond the control of the federation in onships question that justifies the omission. 585 In accordance with the decisions made by the 2) The FIE Executive Committee will examine Congresses held in Paris (1949, 1951, 1959, in each case the reasons for the failure to send 1987), Venice (1955), Madrid (1962) and Gdansk referees and the violation of article 132 of the (1963), World Under-20 Championships are held Statutes and may decide on measures other annually under the auspices of the FIE, compris- than the imposition of a financial penalty. ing individual competitions in foil, epee and sabre § 3. FIE rules for men and in foil and epee for women. 579 Apart from the special rules of the present chapter, The control of the FIE is assured, as is the the FIE Rules for Competitions must be strictly technical direction, under the same conditions as observed during the events of the World Champi- for the World Championships, with the bout onships. committee consisting of five members (Cf. 505). § 4. Order of competitions § 2. Candidature 580 The organizers must submit the schedule of 586 Each year, requests to undertake the organization competitions to the [FIE] Executive Committee for of the World Under-20 Championships must be approval. submitted to the FIE Central Office to be placed on § 5. Bout committee the agenda of the annual Ordinary Congress, 581 The technical organization of the Olympic Games within the time limit specified for the submission and the World Championships is undertaken by a of items for the agenda in the Statutes (Cf. Book of bout committee composed of seven members of Statutes, article 50). different nationalities of whom one represents the The Congress will decide to which national organizing country. federation the organization of these champion- The bout committee chair is appointed from ships will be entrusted for the following year, and among its members by the FIE Central Office. at the same time fix the date and place where they will be held. § 6. FIE Supervision As a general rule, the World Under-20 Champion- 582 In order to ensure that the rules are observed, the ships are held at Easter. President [of the FIE] or the member of the FIE Should no candidate come forward, or should the Central Office appointed by him has the right to national federation to whom the organization is
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 63 Note: Articles 514 to 584 have been modified by the FIE Temporary Provisions, Appendix B of these Rules.
entrusted withdraw, the same rules will be applied § 2. Age of participants as in the case of the World Championships (Cf. 593 Participants must be less than 17 years of age at 571). 00:00 hours on January 1st of the year of the § 3. Entries competition. The lower age limit is that which 587 Entries are limited to three fencers of the same appears in article 119 of the Statutes, i.e. at least nationality for each event. 13 years of age at 00:00 hours on January 1st of Countries that wish to send their fencers to the the year of the competition. World Under-20 Championships must inform the § 3. Candidature and date of the competition federation that undertakes the organization one 594 The rules for bids are the same as appear in article and a half months before the event begins. 586 for the World Under-20 Championships. Eight days before the event begins, the organizing The World Cadet Championships should in country must be advised of the number and names principle be held in the second trimester of the of the participants from each country. Substitution calendar year. of names by countries due to reasons beyond their § 4. Entries control may be made at the latest 24 hours before 595 The rules concerning entries are the same as the beginning of the event (Cf. 535, 578). appear in article 587 above for the World Under- For the World Under-20 Championships, a 20 Championships. delegation must be accompanied by the following 596 The number of referees that each delegation must minimum number of referees: send to the World Cadet Championships is as 1 to 4 fencers: 0 referees follows: 5 to 12 fencers: 1 referee 1 to 4 fencers: 0 referees 13 to 20 fencers: 2 referees 5 to 12 fencers: 1 referee 21 to 30 fencers: 3 referees 13 to 20 fencers: 2 referees § 4. Age of competitors 21 to 30 fencers: 3 referees 588 Participants must be less than 20 years of age on § 5. Rules January 1st of the year in which the World Under- 597 The provisions of article 589 above equally apply 20 Championships are held. The age check will be to the World Cadet Championships, as well as the carried out by the bout committee. provisions relating to the bout committee (article § 5. Rules 590 above). 589 The rules for the World Championships apply to § 6. Order of events the World Under-20 Championships. 598 The organizers must submit the schedule of However, the bout committee will decide, depend- competitions to the [FIE] Executive Committee for ing on the number entered in each event, whether approval. the direct elimination table will begin with 8, 16 or 32 fencers. § 7. Officials present 590 The bout committee for the World Under-20 599 The organizers of the events at the World Cadet Championships consists of only five members of Championships must at their expense invite the different nationalities, of whom one is a represen- following officials: tative of the organizing country. – the FIE President or his representative, named by him; § 6. Timetable of events – the members of the bout committee; 591 The organizers must submit the schedule of – two members of the SEMI Commission competitions to the [FIE] Executive Committee for named by the FIE Central Office; approval. – one member of the Fencing Officials Commis- sion named by the FIE Central Office; Chapter X – one member of the Medical Commission RULES FOR THE WORLD named by the FIE Central Office; and CADET CHAMPIONSHIPS – the number of foreign judges necessary for the smooth running of the competition. § 1. Annual World Cadet Championships 592 In accordance with the decisions made by the Congresses held in Paris in 1985 and 1986 and by the Congress at Luxembourg in 1990, the World Cadet Championships are held annually and recognized as an official FIE competition. This championship consists of an individual competition in each of five weapons. FIE supervision is in effect as for the other official competitions and the FIE rules apply, subject to the specific provisions that follow.
1995 – 64 Rules for Competitions – USFA Notes 7 Chapter VIII, inserted in this technical rule book for reference, has its original text in the book of Statutes of the FIE. It is edited by the Statutes Commission. In the case of material errors or differences in text, the text of the Statutes is considered definitive. 8 The title of “Champion” cannot be awarded for team events unless there is a minimum participa- tion of five teams for men’s events and of four teams for the women’s event. 9 At the Olympic Games, entries for the individual events are limited to three competitors of the same nationality for each event instead of five as at the World Championships. Further, the number of participants from each nation must not exceed 20. 10 Chapter IX, inserted in this technical rule book for reference, has its original text in the book of Statutes of the FIE. It is edited by the Statutes Commission. In the case of material errors or differences in text, the text of the Statutes is considered definitive.
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 65 PART SIX: spare) in perfect working order (Cf. 21, 635, 637, DISCIPLINARY RULES 641). FOR COMPETITIONS11 For any fencer not present, or any team that does not have all its members present, when called by the referee at the time published for the beginning Chapter I – APPLICATION of the pool, match or direct elimination bouts: § 1. Persons subject to these rules – two repetitions of the call, at one minute 601 The provisions of Part VI apply to all persons who intervals, followed by exclusion from the participate in or attend an international fencing competition by the referee if the fencer or the competition in any capacity whatsoever (organiz- entire team have not presented themselves by ers, officials, members of the jury, auxiliary the third call, each call having been made at personnel, team captains, competitors, trainers, one minute intervals (Cf. 635, 640, 641). spectators, etc.), whether or not they are amateurs In the course of the competition (individual or and whatever their nationality. team), when a fencer has been informed that it is Hereinafter, all these persons are described as his turn to fence, if he does not present himself “fencers.” when called by the referee: – application of the penalties specified in § 2. Order and discipline articles 635, 637 and 641 (1st group). 602 Fencers must strictly and faithfully observe the Equally, if a fencer abandons a bout by leaving the FIE Rules for Competitions, the particular rules of strip (Cf. 32/4): the competition in which they are engaged, the – application of the penalties specified in traditional customs of courtesy and integrity, and articles 635, 637 and 641 (1st group). the instructions of the officials. c) Method of fencing In particular, they will comply in an orderly, 605 The competitors must fence faithfully and strictly disciplined and sporting manner to the following according to the rules specified in the chapters provisions; all infractions of these rules may entail dealing with the conventions of fencing in general penalization by the competent disciplinary (Cf. 28) and those of each weapon in particular authorities with or without prior warning, accord- (Cf. 219, 316, 409); all infractions of these rules ing to the facts and circumstances (Cf. 634 to will incur the penalties specified hereinafter (Cf. 641). 635ff). Everybody taking part in or present at a fencing competition must remain orderly and must not d) Acknowledgment of a touch disturb the smooth running of the competition. 606 Every competitor is at liberty to acknowledge During bouts no one is allowed to go near the aloud a touch received at the moment he receives strips, give advice to the fencers, criticize the it. However, the jury is not bound by this acknowl- referee or the judges or insult them, applaud before edgment and may still deliberate on this touch (Cf. the referee’s decision, or attempt to influence him 66f., 72ff). in any way. The referee is obliged to stop immedi- It is, on the other hand, absolutely forbidden for ately any activity that disturbs the progress of the competitors to make any gestures or comments – bout over which he is presiding (Cf. 615). except the acknowledgment of a touch as allowed All offenses will be penalized according to articles – that might influence the decisions of the jury, or 635, 639 and 641 (3rd group). to acknowledge, after the referee’s decision, a touch that has not been awarded. (Cf. 635, 637, § 3. The competitors 641). a) Pledge of honor e) Personal effort 603 By the mere fact of taking part in a fencing 607 Competitors will expend the same effort and give competition, the fencers pledge their honor to the same attention to each bout; they will defend respect the rules and the decisions of the judges, to their personal chances in a sportsmanlike manner be respectful towards the members of the jury and until the end of the competition in order to obtain to obey scrupulously the orders and instructions of the best possible classification, without giving the referee (Cf. 635, 637, 641). touches to or seeking touches from anyone (Cf. b) Presence on time 635, 640, 641). 604 The fencers, completely equipped with materials § 4. Doping conforming to the rules (Cf. 21) and ready to fence, must present themselves at the time and Article 1: GENERAL RULES place specified for the beginning of each pool, 608 a) The use of substances intended to increase match, or direct elimination bout, and also artificially and temporarily physical and whenever the referee requires it during the mental ability in the course of sporting competition. activity is forbidden by the FIE. Any breaking They must present themselves at the strip to fence of this rule will incur disciplinary action. their bouts with two regulation weapons (one Doping is the use or application in any form of products foreign to the body and of organic products in abnormal doses or administered in
1995 – 66 Rules for Competitions – USFA abnormal ways in order to increase perfor- competitions on the top two in the final and mance abusively. (Definition established by on one fencer chosen at random from the the World Congress on Doping, Tokyo, 1964). other finalists. For team competitions, one Because of the serious danger that doping fencer is selected at random from each of the presents to the health of licensed fencers, the top four teams. FIE President, or any other person authorized In addition, the doctors responsible for drug by the FIE for this purpose, may, under testing have the right to submit any athlete to medical supervision, and at any competition drug testing for medical reasons, but this organized under the auspices of the FIE, decision may only be taken by at least two FIE enforce the taking of samples of solids, liquids Medical Commission members, and only after or gases absorbed or secreted by the body of they have notified the FIE President (or his anyone licensed by the FIE in order to have representative) or the FIE observer, as well as them analyzed. the bout committee chair. b) The list of forbidden substances is reviewed by Finally, the competition organizers have the the FIE Medical Commission at its periodic option of examining one or more fencers at meetings. The list is based on that adopted by any time during the competition. They must the IOC. adhere to the following restrictions: This list is submitted for approval by the FIE 1) Make a random selection in the presence and must be published before the start of the of the FIE President (or his representa- competition. It cannot be modified during a tive) or the FIE observer or the bout competition. committee chair. c) The licenses issued by the federations affili- 2) Deliver a notification form in person to ated with the FIE should contain the follow- the fencer, as soon as he or she is elimi- ing clause: nated. “The holder of this license undertakes not to 3) Begin to carry out the drug testing within make use of drugs and to accept any form of an hour of the notification. testing.” The organizers may only perform this d) If a fencer refuses to submit to the taking of unexpected testing if that are assured of the samples as allowed, this refusal must be presence of one or more doping control signed by the fencer, sealed and handed to the specialists. organizers responsible for making a decision. i) It is forbidden for fencers, as well as nonmedi- All fencers should know that in such a case cal trainers, to bring to or have in their they will be assumed, a priori, to have made possession at the competition venue any use of a forbidden substance. doping substances. In principle, no attention e) The organizers of any competition must make will be paid to denunciations. provision for the taking of samples in their j) Any treatment administered during the 72 regulations. The costs of drug tests are the hours preceding the beginning of the competi- responsibility of the association or federation tion must be reported to the doctor on duty by organizing the competition. means of an official form. Local anesthetics f) An athlete is considered as being under the administered by a doctor in the case of an influence of drugs when a forbidden substance injury are permitted. or one of its derivatives with the same k) The result of the test is strictly confidential. characteristics can be objectively found [in his Neither the doctor responsible nor the body] by means of biological analyses made laboratory personnel who carry out the within the framework of an expert opinion analysis are authorized to release any infor- and a second opinion. mation, particularly to the press. g) On the basis of the results of an analysis l) If the result of the analysis is positive, the proving the use of a forbidden substance, the head of the laboratory must immediately association or federation organizing the inform the FIE Medical Commission Presi- competition must set in motion the penalty dent or his representative through the person procedure through the FIE, which will decide responsible for the drug test, and communi- what penalties to impose. cate to him the details of the analysis with a h) The method for selecting fencers for examina- minimum of delay. The FIE Medical Commis- tion is determined in advance each time, at sion President or his representative will the beginning of the competition. At official immediately call a meeting, and invite the FIE competitions, it is determined by the doctor responsible for the fencer (or another delegates of the FIE Medical Commission, doctor authorized by the fencer’s delegation). with the agreement of the FIE President or his The President of the Medical Commission is representative. At category “A” competitions, responsible for sending the report of the it is determined by the organizers, with the analysis to the FIE President and to the fencer agreement of the FIE observer. In principle, in question. the testing will be performed at individual
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 67 m) The fencer may demand in writing from the The fencer may be represented or attend Medical Commission representative a confir- personally. mation of the results, performed on the second Before a final decision, the accused fencer will sample. This demand must be made in the 24 be summoned by the FIE Central Office. He hours following the receipt of the result. will be allowed, if he so wishes, to present his The confirmation should be carried out by the comments in writing. same laboratory. The fencer may nominate a q) Any alteration of the classification of fencers second expert of his choice, who is recognized participating in a competition and the as competent, to attend the analysis of the publication of those decisions will be made by second sample. This confirmation must be the FIE Central Office which alone will have carried out no more than six days after receipt the right to bring them to the notice of the of the appeal, and it may be carried out under member associations. the supervision of one of the FIE Medical Offenses committed and penalized in one of Commission members. the member countries of the FIE will be taken n) In the case of a positive result, the cost of the into account and applied by all member tests of the confirmation and the travel costs countries of the FIE. will be paid by the fencer or federation Article 2: PROCEDURE FOR TAKING concerned. Should the confirmation of the SAMPLES results produce a negative result, the organiz- 608 a) As soon as a fencer who has been randomly ing country will be liable for the costs. A selected for testing has finished competing, a A deposit, as security, of US $200 or its representative of the organizing committee monetary equivalent must be remitted with will request, by giving him a special form, any request for a second opinion. If a confir- that he report within the hour to the waiting mation gives a negative result exonerating the room of the drug testing station, and that he fencer, the deposit will be refunded. bring with him a piece of identification. If a fencer is accused of doping as a result of The fencer or his team captain must sign a the first analysis, he may continue to fence, detachable section of the form that shows the but chiefs of delegations are warned that, time at which he was notified. should this fencer take part in the team event Any fencer subject to doping control (Cf. and should the second analysis confirm that 608h) must confirm with the bout committee he was under the influence of drugs, his team chair that he has not been chosen by the will immediately lose its place in the ranking random drawing before leaving the competi- and be eliminated from the competition. tion site. If he fails to do so and has been o) The members of the Medical Commission will chosen, he will be considered as having send the results of the second test to the refused the testing. President of the Medical Commission. The The fencer may present himself for testing latter will inform the FIE President, whose accompanied by a team official or doctor. responsibility it is to call a meeting of the FIE b) A representative of those conducting the test Central Office members, who will impose the receives the fencer and his official on their necessary penalties and issue an official notice arrival at the drug testing station. He verifies (Cf. 621). the identity of the fencer with the help of his p) Penalties identity card and his competition number. The following penalties are mandatory: c) If the fencer does not arrive at the drug testing 1. Anabolic agents, stimulants, narcotic station within the hour following the delivery analgesics, diuretics, and peptide hor- of the request, this will be noted on his drug mones: testing form (Form 2). – two year suspension for a first d) The only people who are allowed in the offense, medical examination room, other than the – life suspension for a second offense. fencer and the official accompanying him, are 2. Ephedrine, phenylpropanolamine, (at most): codeine, etc. (even when administered – two doctors who are members of the FIE orally for cough or pain control in Medical Commission, invited by the association with decongestants and/or organizing committee at the instigation of antihistamines): the FIE President; – three month suspension for a first – one doctor from the country organizing offense. the competition; – two year suspension for a second – one interpreter, if needed; and offense. – the FIE President or, if necessary, his – life suspension for a third offense. representative. The head of the laboratory accredited by the e) Each fencer’s personal details and the time of IOC that has reported the analysis will be his arrival are entered on his drug testing consulted. form.
1995 – 68 Rules for Competitions – USFA f) The procedures and materials used cannot be organizing committee, the juries, etc., in order to contested if the laboratory that appointed the settle technical matters, register protests, or make sample taker and provided the materials is observations. accredited by the IOC. The members of the team who strictly carry out The number of bottles must exceed the the instructions of their team captain may not be number of anticipated samples. held responsible for them before competent g) If a fencer refuses to provide a sample, he authorities. However, they always remain person- must be warned of the consequences of such a ally responsible for all actions that they may refusal (Cf. 608, article 1, paragraph d)). If he commit other than by the intervention of their persists, his refusal is noted on his individual captain, and for all actions that they commit in form. violation of the provisions of these regulations (Cf. h) A breathalyzer test may be carried out to 602ff). provide evidence of the possible consumption § 6. The members of the jury of alcohol by a fencer. In the case of a positive 610 The members of the jury must fulfill their duties result (an apparent alcohol level of over not only with total impartiality but also with the 0.05%), if the fencer contests this result, he utmost attention (Cf. 55). must submit himself to a quantitative mea- The bout committee (or the organizing commit- surement. If it is not possible to carry out this tee), even if convinced of their perfect good faith, measurement using a breathalyzer, a blood has the power to replace immediately a referee or analysis will be used. If the fencer refuses to member of the jury, if it believes that this replace- take part in this test, he must be warned of the ment is necessary either for technical reasons or to consequences of this decision The penalty maintain the good order of the competition. comes under those described in class 2, article 608, item p). § 7. The coaches, trainers and technicians 611 Coaches, trainers and technicians (amateurs or Article 3: ANALYSIS not) are not permitted in the enclosed area near 608 a) The analysis of a sample must, if possible, be the competitors during the competition. B carried out in the 24 hours following its However, for team events, a team captain has the arrival at the laboratory. right to be with his team (Cf. 609). b) Techniques adopted for analysis will not be Each time he deems it necessary, the referee may contestable in so far as they comply with the authorize someone to render temporary assistance rules established by the IOC, even more so if to a competitor. they are carried out by a laboratory accredited Each nation having a fencer actually participating by the IOC. in the round in progress may designate two c) The following are allowed access to the persons who have the right to place themselves in laboratory in addition to the head of the the vicinity of the enclosure for the strips, near an laboratory and his personnel: the FIE Medical entry point. The organizers will provide the space Commission members, the person responsible necessary for these persons. for doping control and, in the event of a test on the second bottle, the observer chosen by § 8. The spectators the accused fencer. 612 Spectators are obliged not to interfere with the Article 4: LIST OF PRODUCTS FORBIDDEN good order of a competition, to do nothing that IN COMPETITION may tend to influence the fencers or the jury, and 608 As the list of IOC banned substances and to respect the decisions of the jury even when they C procedures is used as a reference by the FIE, do not approve of them. They must obey any they are attached as an appendix and updated instructions that the referee may deem it necessary after each IOC revision. to give them (Cf. 641-3rd group). This list points out that certain federations, including the FIE, may request alcohol level Chapter II testing for fencers at competitions. An alcohol THE DISCIPLINARY AUTHORITIES level of greater than 0.05% leaves the fencer AND THEIR JURISDICTION susceptible to the penalties specified in the rules. § 1. Authorities and jurisdiction 613 The order and discipline of fencing competitions is § 5. The team captain the responsibility, in varying degrees, of the 609 In each international competition, all competitors following persons or authorities: of the same nationality are under the direction of a – the referee (Cf. 615) team captain (fencer or not), who is responsible to – the Organizing Committee (Cf. 503, 616) the bout committee or the organizing committee – the Bout Committee (Cf. 505, 617) for the discipline, conduct, and sportsmanship of – the Jury of Appeal (Cf. 506ff, 618) the members of his team. – the IOC Executive Committee at the Olympic In team competitions, the team captain has the Games (Cf. 505, 506, 619) right to approach the bout committee chair or the – the national federation (Cf. 620)
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 69 – the FIE Central Office (Cf. 504, 582, 621) received, or by excluding them from the – the FIE Executive Committee competition at which he is presiding, all, – the FIE Congress (Cf. 622). according to the circumstances, with or § 2. Principle of jurisdiction without prior warning. In these circum- 614 a) Whatever competent body has made a stances, and if he has judged on a matter of decision, this decision may be subject to a “fact,” his decisions are irrevocable (Cf. 661). possible appeal to a higher authority, but to All warnings (Yellow Cards), Group 3 penalty only one such appeal. touches (Red Cards), and exclusions (Black b) However, every decision made on an appeal Cards) must be noted on the scoresheet. will give the right to an “ultimate” appeal to c) By reason of the right of jurisdiction that he the FIE Congress (when it concerns an official has over all the fencers who participate in or FIE competition) or to the FIE Central Office attend a competition at which he is presiding, (when it concerns any other international he may also recommend to the bout committee competition). the expulsion of spectators, trainers, coaches This ultimate appeal is to be sent to the FIE and other persons who accompany the President by registered mail within a month of competitors from the competition venue (Cf. when the appealed decision took effect. 635, 639, 641). When it concerns a decision made during a d) Finally, he may recommend to the bout competition, the public announcement of the committee (or, in its absence, to the organiz- decision is considered sufficient notification. ing committee) all other penalties that he The ultimate appeal must include a summary believes are merited (exclusion from the entire of the facts, the arguments supporting the competition, suspension or disqualification) appeal and the desired outcome. (Cf. 617). The appeal is communicated to the other e) The bout committee (or, in its absence, the interested parties who may, within a month, organizing committee) is the authority present their own viewpoint. These responses competent to deal with appeals regarding will be communicated, for information, to the decisions of the referee (Cf. 616f., 661). party who has made the appeal. § 4. The organizing committee (Cf. 503) c) No decision on a matter of “fact” may be 616 In disciplinary matters, the organizing committee reversed (Cf. 661). is only competent to act when there is no bout d) An appeal regarding a decision only suspends committee and it assumes the functions of the bout that decision when it can be judged immedi- committee; in these circumstances it must under- ately. On the other hand, an “ultimate appeal” take all the obligations incumbent on the bout does not suspend the decision, except when committee (Cf. 617). the authority that has made the decision § 5. The bout committee (Cf. 505) agrees to suspend it. 617 a) The bout committee has jurisdiction over all e) Every appeal must be accompanied by a the fencers who take part in or attend a deposit of US $80 or its monetary equiva- competition that it directs. lent, and every ultimate appeal must be When necessary it may intervene on its own accompanied by a deposit of US $160 or its initiative in all disputes. monetary equivalent. These sums may be It may impose, either on its own initiative or confiscated in whole or in part for the benefit at the request of the referee, all the penalties of the FIE if the appeal is rejected on the that are applicable during competitions. grounds that it is a “frivolous appeal”; this b) It is the authority that deals with appeals decision will be made by the authority regarding decisions of the referee. In such responsible for ruling on the appeal. However, circumstances, however, if it is not interna- appeals regarding decisions of the referee do tional (Cf. 505), it is obliged to co-opt one not require the deposits mentioned above (Cf. representative of each country participating in 506f, 661f.). the competition. § 3. The referee c) The decisions of the bout committee are 615 a) The referee is responsible not only for the subject to appeal before the Jury of Appeal direction of the bout, the judging of touches (Cf. 506, 618), except, however, those and the checking of equipment, but equally decisions that it has itself taken on an appeal for the maintenance of order of the competi- level and that may only be subject to an tions at which he presides (Cf. 53). ultimate appeal (Cf. 614). b) In his capacity as director of the bout and d) The bout committee is obliged, when neces- arbiter of touches he may, in accordance with sary, to refer complaints, protests or requests the rules, penalize the fencers, either by for appeal that it receives in the prescribed refusing to award a touch that has actually form to the Jury of Appeal. been made on the opponent, by awarding e) Further, at official FIE competitions, it sends against them a touch that they have not in fact direct to the FIE Central Office notification of
1995 – 70 Rules for Competitions – USFA disciplinary penalties levied during the In the case of a disagreement between the two competition, as well as any requests for federations, the file on the matter is forwarded censure, suspension, extension of penalty, to the FIE Central Office. permanent suspension, or ultimate appeals. § 9. The FIE Central Office (Cf. 504, 582) f) The bout committee ensures the execution of 621 a) The FIE Central Office, within the limits of any penalty pronounced finally, or that is not the territories governed by the FIE, is the subject to suspension (Cf. 614). competent body to deal with all matters sent § 6. The Jury of Appeal (Cf. 506) to it by a national federation, a Jury of Appeal 618 a) The Jury of Appeal must be assembled by the or the bout committee of an international bout committee (or when necessary by the tournament. organizing committee), either on its own b) In particular it is the authority that judges initiative or at the request of a team captain, “ultimate appeals” of decisions made during an official delegate of the federation con- international competitions other than official cerned, a referee, or an FIE Central Office FIE competitions (Cf. 614b). delegate (Cf. 582), immediately after the c) The FIE Central Office may impose all competition(s) resulting in the appeal. In no specified penalties. It may confirm, increase case may a Jury of Appeal be assembled or annul penalties imposed by lower authori- during the course of the competition. ties. b) Decisions of the Jury of Appeal, being always § 10. The FIE Congress made at the appeal level, are only subject to 622 The FIE Congress has the same rights as the an ultimate appeal to the FIE Central Office Central Office, especially regarding matters or Congress (Cf. 614). concerning official FIE competitions (Cf. 614). § 7. The IOC Executive Committee at the Olympic Games Chapter III – PENALTIES 619 The International Olympic Committee (IOC) Executive Committee is the final arbiter for all § 1. Categories disputes of a nontechnical nature that may arise 623 There are distinct categories of penalties appli- during the Olympic Games. It may intervene cable to the different types of offenses (Cf. 635ff). either on its own initiative or at the request of a 1° Penalties related to fencing, applicable to national Olympic Committee, the FIE or the offenses committed while fencing, which are: organizing committee (see article 39 of the – loss of ground on the strip, General Rules for the Olympic Games, 1971 – refusal to award a touch actually made, edition) (Cf. 505, 506). – awarding of a touch that has not actually been received, § 8. The national federation – exclusion from the competition. 620 a) The national federation is the competent body 2° Disciplinary penalties applicable to offenses for all fencing events organized in its terri- against the maintenance of order, discipline or tory; it has jurisdiction, through its normal sportsmanship; these are: disciplinary procedures, over all fencers who – awarding of a touch that has not actually reside, even transiently, within its territory. been received, b) It may impose within the limits of its territory – censure, all penalties listed here. – exclusion from the competition, c) It may propose to the FIE Central Office the – exclusion from the tournament, extension beyond its own territory of penalties – temporary suspension, that it has imposed. – permanent suspension, d) It deals with complaints that reach it through – disqualification, the regular channels; it has the right to bring – expulsion from the competition venue. up directly, at whatever stage the matter may be, the question of any offense listed here § 2. Penalties related to fencing committed within its territory. a) Loss of ground on the strip (Cf. 43) e) When a foreign fencer not normally under its 624 A fencer who crosses the lateral boundaries of jurisdiction is concerned, the federation may the strip may be penalized by the loss of only impose the penalty after consultation ground of one meter. with the national federation to which the b) Refusal to award a touch actually made person concerned normally belongs. The 625 Although a fencer may in fact have touched federation in question must give its opinion his opponent on a valid surface, this touch within one month, not including the time may be disallowed, either because it did not required for normal postal delay. If no opinion arrive during the period of time in which has been given at the expiration of this period, fencing is allowed, because the fencer had the penalty is imposed. crossed the limits of the strip, because of defects in the electrical equipment, because violence was involved in the making of the
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 71 touch, or because of another reason specified competition during that tournament, either in in the rules (Cf. 28, 30, 32, 35, 38ff, 42, 47, the same weapon or in another. 73f., 230f., 237, 324ff, 422, 635, 641). When this penalty is applied to a team, the c) Awarding of a touch that has not actually positions of each of the team members must been received be examined individually, and the members of 626 A competitor may be penalized by a touch that that team may, according to the circum- he has not in fact received, either because the stances, be subject to different disciplinary time limit for the bout has expired (penalty measures (Cf. 609). against both competitors), because he has g) Suspension crossed the rear limit of the strip, or because 630 A suspended fencer cannot take part in any he has committed an offense that has pre- international competition during the period of vented his opponent from fencing (fleche with his suspension. jostling, corps à corps in foil or sabre, use of All other suspended persons may not exercise the unarmed hand, etc.) (Cf. 30, 40, 48f., 224, their functions within the time and place 226, 321, 325, 412, 414, 635, 641). limits specified by the suspension. d) Exclusion from the competition h) Permanent suspension 627 A fencer who, while fencing, commits certain 631 Permanent suspension involves the same violent or vindictive actions against his consequences as suspension, but is permanent opponent, who does not honestly defend his (except for the special provisions for clemency personal chance, or who profits from a specified in article 667). fraudulent agreement with his opponent may i) Disqualification be excluded from the competition. 632 The disqualification of a fencer (for example, A fencer who is excluded from a competition for a breach of the amateur rules, or because cannot continue to take part in that competi- he does not conform to the rules regarding tion, even if he is already qualified for age, qualification, etc., required for the promotion to the next round; he loses the competition) does not necessarily incur his right to his individual place and the place that suspension or permanent suspension, if he has he occupied will remain empty; however, the acted in good faith; a request for supplemen- points obtained by that fencer up to the tary penalties for fraudulent intention may, moment of his expulsion remain valid for the however, be filed against the fencer. classification of the team in the team event, A team that has utilized a fencer who is provided that he actually takes part in that disqualified perforce shares his fate and is team event. also disqualified. In a team event, this penalty does not neces- If the disqualification occurs in the course of a sarily involve the disqualification of the whole pool or match, the fencer or team is consid- team, but all touches that remain to be fenced ered as having withdrawn from the competi- for in the bout in progress, as well as all tion (Cf. 525ff). touches that remain to be fenced for in the If it occurs after a competition, the fencer (or remaining bouts by the competitor concerned, team) is removed from the classification, all will be awarded against him. other competitors are maintained in their The referee will decide whether the fencer respective classifications, and this elimination concerned will be excluded only from the will not have a retroactive effect on previous match in progress or whether he will recom- qualification competitions. mend to the bout committee that the fencer be j) Expulsion from the competition or tourna- excluded from all the matches that his team ment venue has left to fence (in which case he may be 633 All participants or noncompetitors (coaches, replaced by a substitute for the remaining trainers, technicians, supporters, officials, matches) (Cf. 562). spectators) may be subject to expulsion, which § 3. Disciplinary penalties has the effect of forbidding them access to the e) Exclusion from the competition venue for the duration of the competition or 628 Exclusion from a competition may also be tournament. imposed for a disciplinary offense (failure to In no circumstances may the application of appear on the strip as required, weapons not this penalty give cause for redress to anyone. conforming to the rules, reprehensible attitude k) Censure towards a judge, etc.). 633 In a case that does not justify a more severe The consequences of such exclusion for the A disciplinary penalty, the fencer or official may fencer are the same as those described in be penalized by censure. article 627. § 4. Announcement of penalties f) Exclusion from the tournament 634 The organizing committee is obliged without delay 629 A fencer excluded from a tournament will no to communicate a decision made by itself, by the longer be allowed to participate in any bout committee or by a Jury of Appeal to the
1995 – 72 Rules for Competitions – USFA national association to which it belongs. The penalized with a Red Card as the result of an national association must register the penalty and offense in the second or third group, he will immediately advise the FIE Central office. receive a further Red Card for the first infraction At official FIE competitions, the bout committee is within the first group. obliged to inform the FIE Central Office without All warnings (Yellow Cards) must be noted on the delay of penalties applied during the competition bout scoresheet. and their reasons (Cf. 617e, 620 c & e). Offenses in the second group At the Olympic Games, where the FIE assumes the 638 In the second group, each offense is penalized, role of organizing committee, the Central Office from the first infraction, by a Red Card (penalty must advise the Olympic Games Committee. touch). Offenses in the third group Chapter IV 639 In the third group, a first infraction is penalized by OFFENSES, THEIR PENALTIES AND a Red Card (penalty touch), even if the fencer at THE COMPETENT AUTHORITIES fault has already received a Red Card as the result of an offense in the first or second group. Nature of the penalties Any Red Card in the third group must be noted on 635 There exist three types of penalty applicable in the the bout scoresheet. cases listed in the table in article 641. They are If the fencer commits, during the same bout, cumulative and valid for the bout (long with one another offense in this group, the referee will or more encounters, or short) – with the exception penalize him with a Black Card (exclusion from of the Black Card, which signifies exclusion from the competition). the competition. Certain offenses may result in the The exclusion (Black Card) must be noted on the annulment of a touch scored by the fencer at fault. bout scoresheet and, if necessary, on the pool or During the bout, only touches scored in conjunc- team scoresheet. tion with the offense are annulled (Cf. 641). For any person disturbing order off the strip, there The penalties are as follows: is: – warning, represented by a Yellow Card with – for the first infraction, a warning that must be which the referee indicates the fencer at fault. noted on the bout scoresheet and registered The fencer thus knows that every further with the bout committee. offense on his part will result in a penalty – for the second infraction during the same touch. competition, a Black Card (expulsion from the – penalty touch, represented by a Red Card site of the competition). with which the referee indicates the fencer at In the most severe cases concerning disruptions on fault. One touch is added to his opponent’s or off the strip, the referee may exclude or expel score; if it involves the last touch, this results the offender immediately. in the loss of the encounter or bout. In Offenses in the fourth group addition, any Red Card may only be followed 640 In the fourth group, the first infraction is penal- by another Red Card or a Black Card, ized by a Black Card (exclusion from the competi- depending on the nature of the second offense tion or the tournament, according to the case). (Cf. 641). The exclusion (Black Card) must be noted on the – exclusion from the competition or tourna- bout scoresheet and, if necessary, on the pool or ment, depending on the offense (fencer), team scoresheet. OR expulsion from the site of the competi- tion (anyone disturbing order), represented The offenses and their penalties by a Black Card with which the referee 641 See the penalty chart on the next page. indicates the fencer or person at fault. Competence 636 The offenses and their penalties, listed in various articles of the rules, are summarized in the attached list (article 641); they are divided into four groups (Cf. 637-640). All these offenses are within the competence of the referee, although the bout committee always retains the right to intervene (Cf. 617a). Offenses in the first group 637 In the first group, the first infraction, regardless of the offense, is penalized by a Yellow Card (warn- ing). If the fencer commits another offense in this group during the same bout, the referee will penalize him each time with a Red Card (penalty touch). If the fencer at fault has already been
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 73 Offenses Articles Penalty Cards First Group: 1st 2nd 3rd (1) Non-conforming equipment, no spare regulation weapon, no name on uniform ...... 21, 27 Simple corps à corps (F,S)...... 34, 224, 412 Corps à corps to avoid a touch, jostling, falling, disorderly fencing, (2) reversing shoulders (F) ...... 28, 34, 224, 318, 412 Y Raising the mask before the halt ...... 28 Covering or substitution of valid target (F,S) ...... 30, 411 E (2) R R Using the non-weapon arm or hand ...... 30 L E Touching/holding the electrical equipment ...... 30 L E Leaving the strip without permission ...... 32 (2) D D Turning the back on the opponent ...... 35 O Crossing the side of the strip to avoid a touch...... 43 W Delaying the bout ...... 48 C C Placing the point of the weapon on the strip during the bout; A A straightening the weapon on the strip at any time (F,E) ...... 211, 316 C (2) R R Grounding the weapon on the lamé (F) ...... 230 A Voluntary touch not on the opponent (F,E)...... 230, 325 D D (2) R Touch scored with the guard (S) ...... 409 Disobedience ...... 602f., 606, 609 D Not present when called by the referee during the competition ...... 604 Unjustified appeal ...... 661 (9) Forward motion with crossing of the legs (S) ...... 417/5
Second Group: (1,3) Absence of inspection marks ...... 21 R R R (2) Violent, dangerous or vindictive act, hit with guard or pommel ...... 28 (4) E E E Unjustified claim of injury ...... 50 Voluntary touch not on the opponent in final minute (F,E) ...... 230, 325 D D D
Third Group: (1,3,4,5) B Falsified inspection marks, modification of equipment ...... 21 (2,5) R Dishonest fencing ...... 28 L (5,8) Fencer disturbing order on the strip ...... 602 E (5) A Offense concerning publicity code ...... Publicity Code D (7,8) C Anyone disturbing order off the strip; (1st: warning; 2nd: expulsion) ...... 602 K Fourth Group: Not present to fence at beginning of competition/pool/direct elimination bout/ B (5) team match, after 3 calls at 1 minute intervals ...... 604, 650 (1,2,4,6) L Obvious fraud in the equipment ...... 21 (2,5) A Intentional brutality ...... 28 (2,5/6) Unsportsmanlike conduct ...... 605 C (5) Favoring the opponent, profiting from collusion ...... 607 K (6) Doping ...... 608
(1) Confiscation of non-conforming equipment. (6) Exclusion from the tournament. (2) Annulment of touch scored by fencer at fault. (7) Expulsion from the site of the competition. (3) Annulment of last touch scored by fencer at fault, even if (8) In the most severe cases, the referee may exclude or fencing has recommenced. expel the offender immediately. (4) Consult medical/technical experts. (9) Annulment of touch scored by fencer at fault; however, (5) Exclusion from the competition. touch correctly scored by opponent is counted. A fencer cannot receive a YELLOW CARD after receiving any RED CARD in the same bout. A fencer does not receive a 3rd group BLACK CARD without already having received a 3rd group RED CARD in that bout.
1995 – 74 Rules for Competitions – USFA Articles 642-650 and 652 are deleted. concerned have been called on to give their 651 The referee and the bout committee, on their own explanations of the occurrence either verbally or in initiative or at the request of an official delegate of writing, within a reasonable interval of time suited the FIE or the organizing committee, have the to the time and place. After this time limit has obligation to expel from the site of the competi- expired, the penalty may be imposed. tion, with or without a warning, any fencer, § 4. Deliberation spectator, trainer, escort, etc.... or auxiliary 664 The decisions of all competent bodies are made personnel or official who, by gestures, attitudes or according to the vote of the majority; in case of statements, disrupts the smooth running of the equality, the referee has the deciding vote. competition. § 5. Reprieve 665 If the party involved has not previously incurred a Chapter V – PROCEDURE penalty of disqualification or suspension, either for § 1. Basic principle the same offense or for one that is effectively the 660 The various penalties are imposed by the compe- same, with or without a reprieve, the authority that tent authorities who will reach their decisions imposes the penalty may at the same time grant a fairly, without being restricted by any regulation reprieve, the duration of which is double that of procedure, and will take into account the gravity the imposed suspension. of the offense and the circumstances in which it If, during the time of the reprieve, from the time was committed (but Cf. 663f.). the decision imposing the penalty was announced, the party concerned incurs no further penalty, the § 2. Protests and appeals original penalty is annulled. In the contrary case, a) Against the decision of the referee the original penalty is enforced and is added to the 661 No protest may be made against a decision of new penalty. the referee regarding a matter of “fact” (Cf. 614c, 615b). § 6. Repetition of an offense If a fencer violates this principle, by question- 666 For offenses against sportsmanship, order or ing a referee’s decision concerning a matter of discipline, a fencer is said to repeat an offense if “fact” during the bout, he will be penalized he commits a new offense, other than violation of according to the provisions of the rules (Cf. the rules governing bouts, 635, 637, 641-1st group). However, if the – within two years, if he has previously been referee ignores a definite rule or makes a censured, or subjected to exclusion, disqualifi- decision contrary to the rules, a protest on this cation or suspension. matter may be entertained. For the repetition of an offense, the penalty to be This protest must be made: imposed is: — by the fencer for individual events, or a) exclusion from the competition, if the previ- — by the fencer or team captain for team ous penalty was censure. events, b) disqualification from the tournament, if the without formality, but courteously, and should previous penalty was exclusion or disqualifi- be made verbally to the referee immediately cation from a competition. and before any decision regarding a subse- c) suspension for double the time of the previous quent touch. penalty, or permanent suspension, if the If the referee persists in his opinion, the bout previous penalty was suspension. committee (or the organizing committee) has § 7. Pardon, remission and commutation of the authority to rule on an appeal (Cf. 615). If penalty such an appeal is judged unjustified, the 667 In exceptional cases, the FIE Central Office and fencer will receive the penalties specified in the FIE Congress, or a national federation, may, articles 635, 637, and 641-1st group. after special consideration, pardon a fencer whom b) Other protests and appeals they have punished, remit the remainder of his 662 Complaints and protests must be made in penalty, or commute the same. writing within a maximum period of one hour after the offending occurrence; they must be Notes addressed to the bout committee or the 11 Penalties relating to the Fencers’ Publicity Code organizing committee. are contained in Appendix A of these rules. Protests regarding the compositions of the pools may only be made up to 2 pm of the day before the event, the official posting of these pools being mandatory 22 hours before the beginning of the competition (Cf. 505). § 3. Investigation – right of defense 663 No penalty may be imposed until after an inquiry has been held in the course of which the parties
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 75 PART SEVEN: 704 Approval is given for the use of the apparatus in AUTOMATIC SCORING EQUIPMENT one specific official competition. However, the Commission is willing, as far as it is able, and without charge, to examine prototypes of appara- Chapter I tus submitted by designers even if the use of such RULES APPLICABLE TO ALL apparatus is not planned for an imminent official AUTOMATIC SCORING EQUIPMENT competition. 705 Approval is given for only one established design § 1. Authorized designs of apparatus that conforms to the furnished 701 Only electrical apparatus with wires connecting diagram, and is not given as a general approval for the fencers to the central scoring machine and all products made by a certain manufacturer. The registering touches by light signals with auxiliary latter may state in their publicity only the fact that audible signals are authorized; this expressly the type of apparatus offered for sale has been used excludes apparatus based on radio waves and those at a specific official competition (if this in fact is with audible signals only. the case), but they themselves must guarantee that 2. Definition of equipment this apparatus conforms to the approved design. 702 All electrical scoring equipment includes: 706 Approval of an apparatus by the Commission as a) Equipment provided by the organizers of a well as its acceptance (Cf. 708) implies no competition, i.e.: guarantee against possible faults in construction, 1° The central scoring machine, with or against its use with a source of electrical current extension lights (Cf. 709, 713ff, 723ff). other than storage batteries (Cf. 709/7). 2° The reels, with cables and connecting 707 All expenses incurred by the SEMI Commission plugs (Cf. 710/7). for the examination of apparatus are the responsi- bility of the persons concerned. 3° The metallic strip that grounds touches § 4. Inspection of apparatus before each made on it (Cf. 711). competition 4° The source of electrical current (storage 708 Before each official FIE competition, the proper batteries) (Cf. 709/7, 716, 729). functioning of the apparatus intended for use and 5° For finals of official FIE competitions, a its conformity to the approved design must be clock that counts down the time and that checked by an FIE SEMI Commission representa- can be connected to the audible signal tive; this inspection is in addition to the approval generator and the electrical scoring of the design detailed above (Cf. 705). machine (Cf. 47, 709/8&9). All the apparatus must be submitted to this 6° For electric sabre competitions, a suffi- representative at least 48 hours before the competi- cient number of sensors (Cf. 17, 19, 428, tion begins. 761ff). § 5. Specifications for all electrical equipment b) The equipment provided by the fencers themselves: a) Central scoring machine (Cf. 713ff, 723ff) 1° The weapon, furnished with a connecting 709 1. A touch made on the metallic strip or on the socket inside the guard and with a special metallic parts of the weapon must not be point at the extremity of the blade for registered by the machine and must not registering touches (Cf. 712, 718ff, prevent the registering of a touch made 731ff); simultaneously by the opponent. In foil a 2° The body cord with plugs for connecting touch made on a part of the foil may register if to the reel and to the weapon (Cf. 710/6); an uninsulated part of the weapon of the 3° The metallic vest (for foil and sabre) (Cf. fencer is in contact with his metallic vest. 424, 722). 2. The machine must not have any device whereby anyone other than the person detailed § 3. Approval of apparatus designs to supervise it can interrupt its working 703 Scoring apparatus for use in an official competi- during a bout. tion must have been approved by the FIE Commis- 3. Touches are registered by light signals. The sion for Electrical Apparatus and Equipment signal lights are placed on the top of the (SEMI Commission). machine, so as to be simultaneously visible to In order to obtain this approval, the apparatus that the referee, the competitors and the superin- is proposed for use must be submitted complete, tendent of the apparatus. By their positions, with reels, connections, etc., for an examination by they must clearly show from which side the the Commission, at a place and date to be agreed touch was made. It must be possible to upon with the Commission at least six months connect extension lights to the exterior of the before the date of the competition. machine in order to increase the visibility of The apparatus must be accompanied by a detailed the signals. However, only the lights on the drawing showing its construction. machine itself are considered as correct if they differ from the extension lights.
1995 – 76 Rules for Competitions – USFA 4. Once the signal lights are lit, they must have double brushes. The wire connected to remain lit until the machine is reset, without the ground circuit of the weapon will be any tendency to go out or flicker as a result of connected to the frame of the reel. subsequent touches or vibrations. 3. The reels must allow the extension of 18 to 20 5. The visual signals are accompanied by audible meters of cable without straining the springs. signals (see under each weapon) (Cf. 713/3, 4. The reel cable socket that is designed to 728). receive the plug on the body cord at the 6. The control switches must be placed either on fencer’s back must include a safety device that the top or the front part of the machine. meets the following conditions: 7. For official FIE competitions, the source of – it must be impossible to fasten it unless power must always be storage batteries. The the plug is correctly put in; wiring of the machine powered in this way – it must be impossible for it to come must be designed so that it is impossible for undone during the bout; and the box to be connected by mistake to the – it must be possible for the fencer to verify main AC electrical supply. that the two foregoing requirements are All fencing salles, clubs, etc., and the organiz- satisfied. ers of training sessions or competitions 5. The resistance of each of the three wires in the involving weapons using electrical equipment floor cords may not exceed 2.5 ohms. may use the current supplied by the main AC 6. The plug used to connect the body cord to the electrical supply on condition that they adhere reel wire and the floor cords to the reels and strictly to the technical standards specified on the scoring machine must have three prongs the subject by their countries and international of 4 mm diameter arranged in a straight line. communities. The outside prongs must be spaced 15 and 20 8. If the clock is not incorporated into the mm from the center prong. The body cord and scoring machine, the machine must have a the floor cords have plugs (male connectors); system for linking in an external clock. This the reel cables and the central scoring clock must be powered by a 12 volt storage machine have the sockets for them (female battery. Disconnection of the cable linking the connectors). clock to the apparatus must simultaneously 7. The use of suspended cables instead of reels is cause blocking of the scoring machine, permitted, provided that the requirements of prevention of any change in the machine’s the preceding paragraphs are satisfied. current state, and stopping of the clock. c) The metallic strip 711 1. The metallic conducting strip is made from There must be a switch inside the machine to metal, metallic mesh or some substance with a change its operating mode and allow the metallic base. The electrical resistance of the machine to be used when not connected to the strip, from one end to the other, may not clock (Cf. 47, 702). exceed 5 ohms. 9. For the finals of official FIE competitions, the 2. The metallic strip must cover the entire width clock must be equipped with a system for the and length of the field of play, including its connection of external displays with large extensions. luminous numbers, and with another system When the competition is fenced on a raised for the connection of an audible signal platform the metallic strip must cover the generator. These two connection systems must entire width of the platform (mandatory for be separated from the circuits inside the official FIE competitions). central scoring machine by means of opto- 3. Because the amount of wire that the reels can couplers (Cf. 47, 702). carry is limited, the metallic strip is designed 10. When the cable connecting the audible signal for use on a strip 14 meters long; an extension generator to the clock is disconnected, the of 1.5 to 2.0 meters is added at each end of the audible signal generator must emit a sound of strip on which the competitors can retreat. between 80 and 100 decibels (measured at the The metallic strip must therefore be 17 to 18 center line of the strip) lasting between 2 and meters long. 3 seconds, but the central scoring machine 4. It is preferable to lay the metallic strip on a must not be blocked and the clock must not wooden surface with some flexible material stop (Cf. 47, 702, 709/9). between. It must be provided with some b) Reels, floor cords and connecting plugs (Cf. device that enables it to be kept well stretched. 717, 730) 5. The paint used to draw the lines on the 710 1. The maximum electrical resistance of each metallic strip must not interfere with electrical wire of the reel, measured from plug to plug, conductivity, so that a touch made on the strip must be 3 ohms. at a point where a line occurs is still 2. Even when the reel is in full rotation, no grounded. interruption of electrical contact may be 6. Organizers must ensure that soldering tolerated. To ensure this, the contact rings will equipment is available, permitting immediate
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 77 repair of any hole that may appear in the Chapter II metallic strip (Cf. 231/8, 328). SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR THE d) Weapons (Cf. 428, 718ff, 731ff) VARIOUS PARTS OF THE 712 1. Inside the guard there must be a cushion ELECTRICAL FOIL EQUIPMENT sufficiently large to protect the electrical wires from the competitor’s fingers. The connec- A) STATIONARY EQUIPMENT tions must be arranged so that it is impossible for the fencer to break or make contacts while § 1. The central scoring machine (Cf. 709) fencing (Cf. 26). a) Principles On foils, the wire must be protected by an 713 1. The machine works by the breaking of the insulating sheath. current in the foil circuit; that is to say that an On epees, the two wires must be protected by electrical current that is constantly flowing in two insulating sheaths, one for each wire. the foil circuit is broken when a touch is The wire and the insulating sheath go all the made. way to the fixed socket. 2. The machine will show a red signal on one In no case may uninsulated wires project side and a green signal on the other for beyond the socket (Cf. 217, 314). touches on a valid surface. The signal will be 2. Any connection system inside the guard is white on both sides for touches on a nonvalid allowed, provided that it satisfies the follow- surface. It must also show a yellow signal if a ing conditions: machine with yellow lights is being used – it must be easy to disconnect and connect; when an uninsulated part of the foil of the – it must be able to be checked with simple fencer who is touched is in contact with his devices such as a penknife or coin; metallic vest (Cf. 645/3). – it must allow easy application of the tip of The second part of this article is not enforced the opponent’s weapon to the part in the case of antiblocking machines. connected to the ground circuit; 3. The audible signals will give either a short – it must be equipped with a security device ring or a continuous note automatically preventing disconnection during the bout; limited to two seconds, one or the other – it must ensure the complete connection of occurring whenever a visual signal appears. the electric wires: even a momentary The audible signal must be the same for the break in contact while the plugs are two sides. connected must be impossible; 4. After registering a nonvalid touch, the – it must not include any part that allows machine must be able to register a subsequent electrical contact to be made between the valid touch on the same side. plug sockets. Note: Article 229 has been modified to read: “if a 3. The electrical resistance required for weapons nonvalid touch occurs, the machine does not register a is specified under each weapon. possible valid touch on the same side.” As noted in Part Those who wish to assemble electrical Two, this rule has not yet been adopted by the USFA. weapons, without the means to perform 5. Conversely, after the registration of a touch on electrical tests, are advised that the specified a valid surface, the machine must not register limits for electrical resistance for the circuits any subsequent touch arriving on the same of each weapon have been chosen so that any side on a nonvalid surface. assembler who is reasonably careful in his 6. No priority must be indicated between a touch work can meet them. registered against one competitor and a touch They are advised: registered against his opponent. – to deoxidize the external surface of the 7. Conversely, after a certain time “X” (which guard and the connecting surfaces inside bears no relationship to “fencing time,” which it thoroughly; is the basis of judging according to the – not to destroy the insulation of the wires, conventions governing foil fencing) following especially where they pass along the the first signal given by the machine, the groove in the blade at the point and at the latter must block out all signals for subsequent guard; and touches. The central scoring machine must be – to avoid accumulations of glue in the capable of being regulated for the period of groove of the blade. time “X” between 700 and 800 milliseconds. b) Sensitivity and regularity 714 1. Any touch must cause a signal whatever the resistance in the circuits external to the scoring machine; the duration of a break in contact that must always ensure that a signal is registered is 5 milliseconds.
1995 – 78 Rules for Competitions – USFA Depending on the increase in the resistance, 9. A specification for tests also exists for the the machine may register: inspection of the functioning of the yellow 1) valid touch only; lights. 2) valid touch and nonvalid touch simulta- 10. The FIE Congress has authorized the SEMI neously; or Commission to modify or complete the above 3) nonvalid touch only. requirements whenever technical improve- The resistance must always be less than 500 ments allow the construction of apparatus that ohms for 1 and 2. can ensure improved operation of the electri- 2. Registration of a valid touch must be ensured cal foil scoring apparatus. in the following conditions: c) Extension lights (Cf. 709/3) – The duration of a break in contact that 715 Extension lights external to the scoring machine causes a valid touch to be signaled must are mandatory for official FIE competitions. The never be less than one millisecond. lights are placed about 1.80 meters above the strip. – The maximum limit for the duration of The two lights of the same group must not be the break in contact that must register a further than 15 cm apart and each group must be valid touch depends on the resistance in at least 50 cm from the other. the return circuit through the opponent’s The white and colored extension lights must be metallic vest as follows: arranged horizontally or vertically on either side 0-250 ohms: 5 milliseconds; of the machine, and the luminous panels must be greater than 250 ohms: 500 milliseconds. visible from all directions (Cf. 713/2). A machine will be rejected if the registration Yellow extension lights must be included on the of a valid touch is possible with a speed of less extension light stand but they must not be placed than 1 millisecond. near the lights that register valid or nonvalid On the other hand, the registration of touches touches (Cf. 747). must always be possible below 5 milliseconds, Lights showing the number of touches may not be even with an external resistance of up to 250 placed alongside the extension lights. ohms. d) Source of electrical current (Cf. 709, 729) 3. A nonvalid touch must be registered for a 716 1. The apparatus must be based on a 12 volt break in contact of 2 to 10 milliseconds’ supply or, if the sources of current for each duration when the exterior resistance is side of the apparatus are separate, on 2 x 12 between 0 and 200 ohms. volts or possibly 2 x 6 volts (separation of the 4. The scoring machine must be capable of current supply is recommended; it can tolerating an increase in the resistance in the simplify a number of problems encountered in closed circuit of the foils of up to 200 ohms, the construction of foil apparatus). without causing a “nonvalid” signal to 2. The apparatus may include indicator lights to register. show that the power is switched on. Such 5. Even if the resistance in the foil ground lights should be colorless. circuit is increased up to 100 ohms, none of the following irregular phenomena must § 2. Reels, floor cords and connecting plugs occur: (Cf. 710) — registration of touches on the guard or the 717 In foil, the connection of the various wires to the strip; three sockets of the reel is as follows: — registration of a touch merely by contact – socket 15 mm from the central socket: to the of the blade or the tip (without depressing metallic vest, it) on the metallic vest of either opponent. – center socket: to the wire in the foil, 6. If faulty insulation of one of the competitors – socket 20 mm from the central socket: to the causes a current leakage between his metallic foil ground circuit and the metallic strip. vest on the one hand and his weapon or the The crocodile clip of the body cord must be of a metallic strip on the other, corresponding to a strong type and ensure excellent contact with the resistance that could go down to 250 ohms, metallic vest. the machine must nevertheless continue to This clip must conform to the conditions of register normally touches exchanged, whether manufacture and assembly specified in article 217. valid or nonvalid. The wire joining the crocodile clip to the rear plug 7. When the blades are in contact, irrespective of of the body cord must have a free length of at least the electrical resistance between them, the 40 cm and must be soldered to the crocodile clip. machine must be capable of normally register- The solder must not be covered by any insulation ing the touches exchanged, valid and non- or any other substance. The body cord and valid. connecting plugs must satisfy the conditions of 8. A specification for tests of apparatus under manufacture and assembly specified in article 217. different conditions will be supplied on request by the FIE Commission for Electrical Apparatus and Equipment.
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 79 B) WEAPONS (Cf. 712) 3.5 x 0.60 thread). The threading must be § 1. Principle very tight. 718 The foil has a single wire, glued in a groove cut The part of the blade on which the barrel is the length of the blade, which permanently fixed must be 7 to 8 mm long and entirely connects the point to the corresponding socket covered by the barrel. Threading only the half inside the guard. At rest the tip is also in contact of this length at the end of the blade is with the metallic part (ground circuit) of the foil. recommended. On the other half the barrel When a touch is made, this contact must be will have a smooth surface of 3.5 mm diam- broken. eter into which the corresponding part of the blade must be introduced with some force. § 2. Points and tips 5. When a barrel made of light alloy is used, 719 1. The diameter of the tip is between 5.5 and 7.0 instructions should be sought from the SEMI mm; the diameter of the body of the point Commission. including its exterior insulation must not be 6. At the point where the wire passes into the more than 0.3 mm less than that of the tip. point, the width of the groove must not exceed 2. The tip is cylindrical; its front surface is flat 0.5 mm, and its depth must not exceed 0.6 and perpendicular to its axis. mm, measured on the diameter of the core of Its edge will either be rounded with a radius the thread, in order to weaken the section of of 0.5 mm or have a 0.5 mm chamfer at 45°. the blade as little as possible. 3. The pressure required on the tip in order to 7. Only members of the SEMI Commission or break the contact and cause the machine to the bout committee may require the verifica- register a touch must be more than 500 tion of the above points. grams; that is to say that this weight must be lifted by the point spring (Cf. 211). The § 4. Insulation of the point and the blade weight of 500 grams supplied by the organiz- 721 The body of the point and the foil blade for a ing committee may have a tolerance of ± 2 length of 15 cm from the point, as well as the grams, i.e. from 498 to 502 grams. pommel or the rear extremity of the handle, must 4. The travel of the tip required to cause the be entirely covered with insulating material scoring machine to register a touch, called the (electrical tape, adhesive tape, cellophane tape, “lighting stroke,” may be infinitesimally plastic or varnish) (Cf. 211). short; the total travel of the tip is a maximum The flange of the sleeve that slides in the base of of 1 mm. the point and within which is fixed the tip must be 5. The tip must be retained in the point at at of a smaller diameter than the insulated head of least two evenly spaced places, or by any other the tip itself, to prevent accidental contact with the method approved by the Commission for metallic vest when a touch is made. Electrical Apparatus and Equipment. C) METALLIC VESTS, MASKS AND § 3. Method of affixing the point BODY CORDS 720 If the base of the point is not made in one piece 722 1. The metallic vest must cover entirely and with the blade, or if it does not permit the flattened without omission the fencer’s valid surface. end of the blade to be retained, it must be screwed Details of its dimensions are given in Part II on to the end of the blade, which must be cut and (Cf. 216, 220). threaded for this purpose, meeting the following 2. The interior of metallic vests must be electri- conditions: cally insulated by a lining or an adequate 1. Normally, only attachment by metal to metal treatment of the lamé material. is allowed. Nevertheless, attachment by means 3. The lamé material used must have metallic of an insulating material providing great thread in both warp and weft; regarding mechanical strength may be allowed after electrical conductivity, it must meet the approval by the Commission for Electrical following conditions: Apparatus and Equipment. a) The electrical resistance measured 2. All soldering or brazing or in general any between any two points of the lamé heating that may affect the temper of the blade material must not be greater than 5 ohms. are forbidden. Only soldering with soft solder The resistance will be measured by using and a soldering iron solely to prevent the a 500 gram copper or brass weight that point from coming loose is authorized. has a hemispherical end with a radius of 3. Before threading, the end of the blade must 4 mm. This weight, placed on this end not have a diameter at any point that is less and moved over the lamé material, must than 3.5 mm, and this without anything being maintain continuous contact, with a wrapped around it, a process that is strictly maximum resistance of 5 ohms. forbidden. b) In no case will holes, patches of oxidation 4. For a steel barrel, the diameter of the core of or other defects that may prevent the the thread must not be less than 2.7 mm (SI registration of a valid touch be tolerated.
1995 – 80 Rules for Competitions – USFA c) A metallic vest that is considered to be e) Visual signals unusable will be so marked with a very 727 1. Visual signals include at least two light bulbs visible colored paint by a member of the on each side, so designed that if one bulb does FIE Commission for Electrical Apparatus not function it does not prevent the other from and Equipment. lighting up, nor cause an excessive current 4. The wire mesh of the mask must be insulated through the latter. internally and externally by an insulating 2. The signal lights must give a red signal on material resistant to shocks, applied before the one side of the machine and a green signal on mask is made up. the other. 5. Masks and metallic vests conforming to the 3. The machine must have an indicator light to above specifications are mandatory for FIE show that it is switched on. This light should official competitions. be dim and colorless. 6. In any case, if for any reason whatever a 4. The machine may include lights that indicate fencer’s equipment does not conform to leakage to ground. These are orange in color. paragraphs 2, 3 and 4 above, article 231 will 5. The light bulbs indicating touches are usually not apply if a valid signal results from a touch covered with translucent shades. However, it on a nonvalid surface. must be possible to remove these shades and 7. The body cord, its connecting plugs and its use bare bulbs when the ambient lighting crocodile clip must meet the conditions of conditions make it preferable to do so (strong manufacture and assembly specified in article sunlight or outdoors). 217. f) Audible signals 728 The apparatus’ audible signal must be loud. It may Chapter III include a device that allows the audible signal to SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR THE be stopped before the machine is reset. VARIOUS PARTS OF THE g) Source of electrical current (Cf. 709, 716) 729 1. The apparatus must be based on a 12 volt ELECTRICAL EPEE EQUIPMENT supply. The electrical connection on the A) STATIONARY EQUIPMENT apparatus provided to connect it to the power supply must be so constructed that it is § 1. The central scoring machine impossible to connect the apparatus by a) Principles mistake to the main AC electrical supply. 723 The machine registers when contact is made 2. If the apparatus is constructed for use with dry between the wires forming the circuit in the epee, cell batteries, it must be equipped with a thus allowing current to flow. voltmeter or other device allowing checking of b) Timing the state of the batteries at any time. Never- 724 The machine must register only the first touch that theless, the apparatus must always be pro- arrives. If the interval between two touches is less vided with the electrical connections de- than 40 milliseconds (1/25th of a second), the scribed above to enable it to be powered by machine must register a double touch (both signal storage batteries. lights must light up simultaneously). Above 50 § 2. Reels, floor cords, connecting plugs and milliseconds (1/20th of a second), the machine body cords (Cf. 710) must register only one touch (only one signal light 730 In epee, the connection of the various parts by is lit). The tolerance allowed for the machine three-prong plugs and sockets on the reels and timing is between these two limits (1/25th and 1/ floor cords is as follows: 20th of a second). – the prong 15 mm from the central prong: to c) Sensitivity the wire in the epee that is most directly 725 When the external resistance is normal (10 ohms), connected to the tip; the registration of touches must be ensured with a – the center prong: to the other wire in the epee; duration of contact of from 2 to 10 milliseconds. – the prong 20 mm from the central prong: to With an exceptional external resistance of 100 the epee ground circuit and the metallic strip. ohms, the machine must still register a touch, but – The epee body cord and its connecting plugs without any specific duration of contact. must meet the requirements for manufacture The machine must not register signals of less than and assembly specified in article 314. 2 milliseconds duration. d) Nonregistration B) WEAPONS (Cf. 712) 726 The machine must not register touches that are § 1. Principle made on grounded material (guard or metallic 731 The epee has two electrical wires, glued in a strip) even when there is a resistance of 100 ohms groove in the blade, connecting the point, as stated in the ground circuit. above, to two of the connecting plugs inside the guard and forming the active circuit of the epee.
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 81 Figure VII-1: Epee Points and Tips
The body of the epee (ground circuit) is connected The diameter of the crown of this tip is 8.00 to the third socket. mm, with a tolerance of ± .05 mm. § 2. Points and tips (Cf. 311) Its lighting stroke (travel) must be greater (Cf. Fig. VII-1, Epee Points and Tips) than 1.0 mm, as for the normal point (Cf. 732 1. (Article under revision) 732/4). The tip is cylindrical. Its front surface is flat 2. The pressure required on the tip in order to and perpendicular to its axis. Its edge will establish the circuit in the epee and thus cause either be rounded with a radius of 0.5 mm or the machine to register a touch must be more have a 0.5 mm chamfer at 45°. than 750 grams; that is to say that this weight The diameter of the crown of the tip is 8.00 must be lifted by the point spring (Cf. 311). mm, with a tolerance of ± 0.05 mm. The 3. The weight used to inspect competitors’ epees diameter of the barrel must not be less than on the strip consists of a metal cylinder drilled 7.7 mm. part of the way along its axis to form a hole The flange (collar) that guides the tip as well parallel to its sides; this hole, into which is as any insulating washer must be sufficiently inserted the end of the blade, must have an recessed in relation to the crown (it is recom- insulating lining to prevent its metallic parts mended that it be recessed in diameter by 0.3 from coming into contact with the epee blade, to 0.5 mm) so that it will not be possible to which would then give a false result to the cause a touch to be registered merely by test. This 750 gram weight supplied by the sliding the depressed tip against the convex organizing committee may have a tolerance of surface of the guard (Cf. Fig. VII-2, Epee ± 3 grams, i.e. from 747 to 753 grams. Point on Guard) (Cf. 326/2a). 4. The distance traveled by the tip in order to The Tollbom point, quite different in concep- cause the machine to register a touch by tion from that specified above, may be used in completing the circuit of the epee, called the official FIE competitions and in other interna- “lighting stroke,” must be greater than 1.0 tional competitions. mm. The further distance that the tip may travel must be less than 0.5 mm. (This
Figure VII-2: Epee Point on Guard 1995 – 82 Rules for Competitions – USFA requirement is just as essential as that for the 5. The groove enabling the wires to enter the lighting stroke). point must be cut in such a way that it To enable an inspection to be made on the weakens the section of the blade as little as strip, the total travel of the point must be possible. greater than 1.5 mm (Cf. 18). 6. Only members of the SEMI Commission or It is forbidden to adjust the “lighting stroke” the bout committee may require the verifica- after the point has been assembled on the tion of the above points. weapon, by means of screws or any other external device. Chapter IV An external screw or similar device is only allowed if it serves to secure the assembling of SPECIAL CONDITIONS THAT MUST the point. BE FULFILLED BY THE DIFFERENT The head of such a screw or device must never PARTS OF THE ELECTRIC FOIL project beyond the flat top surface of the EQUIPMENT point, and its housing in the flat surface must (continued from Chapter II) not exceed 2 mm in diameter. 5. The tip must be retained in the point at at STATIONARY APPARATUS least two evenly spaced points, or by another 1. Main recording machine with the addition of system approved by the SEMI Commission. yellow lights (for the detection of faults in the 6. Only points that are capable of maintaining insulation) unchanged their initial characteristics 741 This machine must satisfy the requirements of inspected at the beginning of the competition articles numbered: as specified in the rules, even if they are – 701-709 inclusive subjected to numerous and different trials, – 713-716 inclusive. regardless of angle or intensity, and that 742 The addition of yellow lights to the foil scoring correspond to the attached design, will be machine allows the implementation of the mea- approved. sures specified in article 230, paragraph 3. § 3. Method of affixing the point Basic principles 733 If the base of the point is not made in one piece 743 1. The yellow lights, called warning lights, with the blade, or if it does not permit the flattened function whenever a metal part of the foil or end of the blade to be retained, it must be screwed the metallic strip comes into electrical contact on to the end of the blade, which must be cut and with that same fencer’s metallic vest. threaded for this purpose, meeting the following 2. However, if this contact is only momentary, conditions: the yellow light or lights should light up 1. Normally, only attachment by metal to metal automatically without an audible signal and is allowed. However, attachment by means of should go out again as soon as the contact is an insulating material providing great broken. mechanical strength may be authorized after 3. On the other hand, when there is contact approval by the SEMI Commission. between a fencer’s foil and his metallic vest at 2. All soldering or brazing or in general any the moment when his opponent makes heating that may affect the temper of the blade – a touch on a valid surface, or are forbidden. Only soldering with soft solder – even a touch on a part of the weapon, and a soldering iron solely to prevent the the yellow light or lights must light up point from coming loose is authorized. automatically and activate an audible signal. 3. Before threading, the end of the blade must The yellow light or lights must then remain not have a diameter at any point that is less lit. than 4 mm, and this without anything being 4. They may only be switched off manually. wrapped around it, a process that is strictly 5. Only yellow light signals accompanied by forbidden. audible signals may cause the referee to apply 4. The diameter of the core of the thread at the penalties. end of the blade must not be less than 3.05 6. For resetting of the yellow lights, the machine mm (SI 4.0 x 0.70 thread). must have a special manual switch, visible to The part of the blade on which the barrel is the referee, which must be located either on fixed must be 7 to 8 mm long and entirely the top or the front of the machine. covered by the barrel. Threading only the half 7. The signals of the yellow lights must not of this length at the end of the blade is cause or influence the registering or non- recommended. On the other half the barrel functioning of the lights that register touches, will have a smooth surface of 4 mm diameter whatever the external resistance may be. into which the corresponding part of the blade 8. Conversely, the lights for registering touches must be introduced with some force. must not cause or influence the registering or
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 83 nonfunctioning of the yellow lights, whatever Chapter V the external resistance. SPECIAL CONDITIONS THAT MUST BE Adjustment FULFILLED BY THE DIFFERENT 744 1. The yellow light on the side of a fencer must PARTS OF THE ELECTRICAL automatically light up and remain lit as soon as the resistance between the metallic vest of SCORING APPARATUS FOR FOIL the that fencer and his weapon is between 0 (continued from Chapters II & IV) and 450 ohms; above 475 ohms, the yellow light must never light up. STATIONARY EQUIPMENT 2. The yellow light on the side of a fencer must Scoring machine with antiblocking system automatically light up and remain lit as soon 751 This apparatus must conform to the requirements as the resistance between the metallic vest of of the rules set out in articles: that fencer and the metallic strip is less than – 701-709 inclusive 150 ohms. – 713-714/5 inclusive 3. When the blades of both fencers touch and – 714/7-716 inclusive remain in contact with a resistance of less 752 Even if a fault in the insulation in a fencer’s than 150 ohms, the yellow lights must not equipment causes a leakage of current between the indicate contact between the metallic strip and metallic vest on the one hand and the weapon on either the metallic vest or the metal parts of the other, the machine should nevertheless be the foil of one of the fencers. capable of registering both valid and nonvalid Tests of the apparatus will be carried out with touches. a resistance of 100 ohms. 753 In the case specified in article 752, the machine 4. The yellow light must not light up if the must register touches on the ground circuit of the contact is of less than 5 milliseconds. foil of the fencer with the insulation fault if the It must light up if the contact is longer than resistance of this current leakage is between 0 and 10 milliseconds. 100 ohms, but if the resistance in the return circuit This difference between 5 and 10 milliseconds of the opponent’s foil increases to 200 ohms, in no represents the permitted technical tolerance. case may there be an absence of registration of Light signals touches. 745 1. The yellow lights will have at least two bulbs 754 The machine must be equipped with two yellow placed on the side of each fencer in such a lights and regulated as specified in article 744/1. way that if one fails to function, this neither 755 These yellow lights serve only to indicate insula- prevents the lighting up of, nor overloads, the tion faults. other. 756 If one or both of the yellow lights remain lit up, 2. The yellow lights may be part of the central the referee must stop the bout and call the techni- scoring machine, or in a separate piece of cal experts on duty to remedy the fault. equipment connected to the central machine. The yellow lights need not necessarily indicate 3. In the latter case, the separate equipment must contact between the fencer’s metallic vest and the have an indicator light to show that it is metallic strip. switched on. This light must be dim and 757 The yellow lights need not be duplicated on the colorless. extension light standards. 4. The yellow lights must be placed either on the 758 There must be no signal from touches made on the top or on the two sides of the machine, easily metallic strip if the resistance in series between the visible to the referee, but quite separate from scoring machine and the metallic strip does not the lights for registering touches. exceed 150 ohms. Electrical supply If both fencers touch the metallic strip at the same 746 As far as the power source is concerned, any moment and if one of them has a current leakage separate yellow light equipment must respect between his foil and his own metallic vest, no articles 709/7, 716 and 729. signal is permitted. Extension lights 747 Yellow extension lights should be fitted to the Chapter VI extension light standards only if the scoring SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS FOR THE machine is one that signals the blocking at the VARIOUS PARTS OF THE moment a valid touch is scored, by means of the ELECTRICAL SABRE EQUIPMENT yellow light remaining illuminated and by emitting an audible signal. A) STATIONARY APPARATUS Central scoring machine a) Principles 761 1) The machine functions with the aid of a sensor (shock detector / accelerometer) and by
1995 – 84 Rules for Competitions – USFA contact between the sabre blade and the nent’s valid surface is between 0 and 250 opponent’s metallic surface. ohms. Above 350 ohms, touches must not be 2) Each machine is designed for use with a registered. particular type of sensor. Therefore, the latter 2) The duration of contact during which registra- is an integral part of the scoring machine and tion is ensured must be from 0.1 ms to a must be attached to the sabre at the moment of maximum of 1 ms. These values may be use. modified after laboratory tests carried out by 3) The sensor attached to the sabre is sensitive to the SEMI Commission. An apparatus will not cuts (including back edge cuts and cuts with be approved if the registration of touches is the flat of the blade) as well as thrusts. It possible with a speed of less than 0.1 ms causes the machine to register a touch. (value subject to change). 4) The machine shows a red signal on one side 3) The scoring machine must accommodate, and a green signal on the other side for without any problems, an increase in the touches registered on the valid metallic resistance of the external connections of up to surface. 100 ohms. If the guard or the blade of a fencer is in 4) When defective insulation, down to 0 ohms contact with the metallic part of his equip- resistance, causes a current leakage between a ment (yellow light illuminated), valid touches fencer’s metallic surface and his weapon, the by this fencer must always be registered. machine must still register all touches 5) The audible signal will consist either of a exchanged. The insulation fault must be short ring or of a continuous tone of 1 to 2 indicated by the illumination of the yellow seconds’ duration, simultaneous with the light on the side of the fencer at fault for illumination of the lights. The sound will be values of resistance from 0 to 450 ohms. the same for both sides. Registration of a valid touch on the guard or 6) Contact or a possible hit with the bell guard the blade of the fencer at fault will be allowed on the valid surface of the opponent must if the electrical resistance between the guard never register a touch.12 or the blade and the valid surface is less than 7) Touches on non-metallic surfaces must not be 250 ohms. registered. 5) When the blades are in contact or there is 8) Touches are registered when contact between contact between the blades and the guards or the blade and the metallic surface of the between the two guards of the fencers, the opponent occurs in conjunction with the proper functioning of the apparatus must be triggering of the sensor. ensured. 9) The machine will be equipped with two 6) Contact between the blade and the metallic yellow lights – one on each side – that surface of the opponent must be retained in indicate faults in the circuit, particularly memory for 50 ms (± 25 ms). contact between the guard or blade of a fencer 7) If contact between the blade and the opposing and a metallic part of his own equipment. target occurs “through the blade,” the whip- 10) The machine will be equipped with two white over touch lights, identical to those for the foil apparatus, – will register between 1 and 5 ms (± 1 ms) which indicate by their constant illumination, – will not register between 5 and 10 ms (± 1 accompanied by an audible signal, any ms) abnormal change in the electrical state of the – will always register from 10 ms to 210 sensor’s circuit. ms. 11) The machine must not register a “whipover” 8) In the case of a non-registered “whipover” touch, hitting the opponent across the blade or touch, whatever the method used to prevent the guard. registration of the touch, after 25 (± 5) ms 12) After a touch is registered, a subsequent touch from the “whipover” contact with the valid in the opposite direction will only be regis- surface (the time for registering the “whip- tered within a maximum of 2 seconds. over”), unless there has been another touch, No priority will be indicated between a touch the machine must permit the normal registra- registered against one fencer and a touch tion of subsequent touches. registered against his opponent. 9) In order to prevent registration of passé 13) When the two blades are in contact, all other touches, if the blade comes in contact with the rules remain in effect. opponent’s metallic surface and the sensor is The SEMI Commission reserves the right to not triggered within the delay specified in change the rules concerning the apparatus to 762/6 after such contact, no touch may be simplify or improve its functioning. registered unless the contact between the b) Sensitivity and regularity blade and the metallic surface is interrupted 762 1) While the sensor is triggered, registration of a for at least 50 (± 5) ms. valid touch must always be ensured if the resistance between the blade and the oppo-
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 85 B) SENSOR a) General conditions for the sensor 763 1) Dimensions: The outer casing of the sensor must be cylindrical in shape with a maximum diameter of 2.5 cm and maximum length of 6 cm, including the plug. 2) Construction: The sensor may only be adjusted if the external case or protective covering has been destroyed. No adjustment from the outside is permitted. The sensor’s case must enclose in an inacces- sible fashion the part that ensures electrical contact with the guard. 3) Before each tournament, the sensors to be used must be inspected by the organizers so as to ensure that their settings are the same, within the limits fixed by the rules. 4) Organizers must provide three sensors for each strip, available at the inspection table, and two sensors per strip, in reserve, available in the armory room. b) Adjustment of the sensor 764 All measurements being performed on the FIE prototype apparatus, the impact is made on the cutting edge of the blade, 6 cm from the tip, by dropping the blade. The change in state of the sensor allowing registration of a touch must be ensured in the following cases: 1) Dropping onto a hard surface: – a fall from a height of less than 1 cm may not trigger the sensor. – a fall from a height of more than 2 cm must trigger the sensor. – for a fall from between 1 and 2 cm, the sensor may or may not be triggered. 2) Dropping onto a soft surface: – the limits are 1.5 cm and 3 cm, respec- tively. 3) Thrusts (where the sabre’s hitting the target is comparable to its being dropped vertically): – if the distance between the tip and the target is less than 0.5 cm, the sensor must not be triggered. – if the distance is greater than 1 cm, the sensor must always be triggered. The surfaces are those on the prototype apparatus. The hard surface is comparable to the trim on a mask. The soft surface is the hard surface, placed on a spring that supports its weight (maximum 100 grams). For thrusts, the target is a hard, fixed surface.
Notes 12 Provision 6 is only valid for weapons with insula- tion between the blade and the guard (Cf. 428, last sentence.)
1995 – 86 Rules for Competitions – USFA In any case of conflict between different Appendix A: contracts, the order of priority is as follows: FIE, national federation, region, club, group, FIE Fencer’s Publicity Code and team. The Publicity Code was adopted 21 May 1983 by the In the context of the Olympic Games and their 64th FIE Ordinary Congress, in Alghero, under the preparation, arrangements made by a national presidency of Mr. Gian Carlo Brusati, MH. Olympic Committee take priority over those The proposed text, edited by Mr. Jacques Hochstaetter, made by a national federation, a region or a President of the Special Commission, had previously club. been submitted for approval to the International 3. A fencer may not enter into an individual Olympic Committee. The IOC, in its letter of approval publicity contract nor receive any remunera- of 12 April 1983, confirmed that the Publicity Code tion related to publicity without the agreement conformed to the existing rules on amateurism. of his national federation, according to the I. General Principles provisions of Article 93.2.b of the Statutes and of Chapter III below. 1. For all Olympic and pre-Olympic competitions, only the rules of the Olympic Charter are appli- B) Procedure cable, particularly rules 26 & 53 and the appli- 1. The contract must be in written form and signed cable texts. by the parties, and accepted by the fencers con- 2. The present code applies, under the terms of the cerned. rules of the IOC, to all fencing competitions, 2. National federations are responsible to their whoever is responsible for organizing them (FIE, national Olympic Committees and to the FIE for national federation, regional organization or club). the regularity of contracts entered into by regions 3. Advertising in the places where fencing takes and clubs, and may specify procedures for check- place is the responsibility of the organizers. It is ing or approving these contracts. permitted to the extent that, in the opinion of the 3. In any case of litigation or breaking of the rules, bout committee, it does not inconvenience the the FIE, or the Central Office on its behalf, may fencers, the judges or the public. demand from the national federation, region or Television requirements must be respected. club all relevant details, including the contract 4. This code is not concerned with the naming of a itself with the exception of the economic and tournament. financial clauses. 5. The IOC has reiterated that, according to the rules C) Position of the fencer of the European Economic Community, no 1. No fencer may personally receive any remunera- sanctions can be imposed on a fencer who refuses tion relating to an advertising contract entered into to participate in an advertising contract entered by a group of which he is a member. into by his national federation. 2. No fencer may be made to participate against his will in an advertising contract, even one in which II. Collective Advertising Contract there is an exclusivity clause. A) The parties 3. No fencer may be omitted from selection or from a A collective advertising contract is agreed between: sporting activity solely because he does not wish to 1. The sponsor: a commercial, industrial or philan- participate in any advertising activity. thropic concern that proposes to support, under 4. A fencer may be refused a share in a grant (for certain conditions, a team, group of fencers, club, travel, maintenance, equipment, etc.) that is regional organization, federation or the organizer financed by an advertising contract in which he of a tournament. does not wish to participate. 2. A sporting group officially recognized according 5. A fencer who has been selected may not refuse to to the standards of the FIE or a national federa- wear and use standard equipment as specified by tion. his national federation for the whole of a national a) A contract for the exploitation of a fencer’s team for a particular competition. image (Cf. IV B) may only be entered into by the FIE, the national Olympic Committee or III. Individual Contract the national federation of the team concerned A) Principle (Cf. Article 93 of the Statutes and Rule 26 of A fencer may enter into a contract with a company or the IOC). institution capable of aiding him - including finan- b) A contract for publicity materials to be worn cially - in his preparation, but only with the express (Cf. IV C) may be entered into by the FIE, the and written agreement of his federation. national Olympic Committee, the national B) Restrictions federation, the regional organization or the The contract can only relate to the exploitation of the club of the team concerned. image of the fencer. In particular, it cannot contain any c) An organization may only enter into a provision relative to the fencer’s method of training or contract within its own competence. to the choice of competitions in which he participates. To be approved by the national federation concerned,
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 87 the contract must expressly state that the requirements — exploitation of a fencer’s performance of the federation or club systematically and in all cases — any other exploitation of the image or fame of override those of the company or institution that has a fencer for publicity purposes. signed the contract. b) Regulations Any money destined for the fencer must pass through The measures outlined above (Cf. II) are alone his national federation. applicable, as well as Article 93 of the FIE Statutes and Rule 26 of the IOC. IV. Specific Regulations C) Advertising worn or carried A) Trademarks a) Definition a) Definition 1. Advertising worn or carried refers to any The trademark is the name or logo that identifies name or logo other than the trademark (Cf. the origin, the manufacturer or the seller of a IV.A) that appears on a fencer’s main or particular piece of the fencer’s equipment. ancillary equipment and that comes from a As soon as the trademark exceeds the normal or firm other than the manufacturer or distribu- authorized dimensions, it becomes an advertise- tor of the equipment in question. ment and comes under the jurisdiction of the 2. A trademark that is larger than the sizes that regulation below (Cf. IV C). are usual or specified above (Cf. IV.A) b) Position and sizes constitutes advertising. 1. The articles of the fencers’ equipment may 3. All advertisements for alcoholic drinks, carry the following visible trademarks: tobacco and any others against the sporting Mask: one trademark on the spring at the rear. ethos are forbidden. Maximum size: 6 x 5.5 cm. b) Fencing clothing and material Jacket: one trademark at the bottom of the No advertising is permitted either on the clothing jacket on the hip on the side of the or the equipment of a fencer (weapon, mask, etc.), unarmed hand. Maximum size: 4.5 x 2 nor any other display (logo, name, etc.) other than cm. the trademarks authorized above (Cf. IV.A), with Breeches: one trademark at the bottom of the the exception of the mask, which may bear, if the leg, on one side only. Maximum size: 4.5 organizers so provide, a self-adhesive label for the x 2 cm. current competition (Cf. D, below). Stockings: one trademark on each stocking of However, on the condition that the rules relative to size 4.5 x 2 cm. the electrical apparatus and the fencers’ equipment Shoes: the name of the brand on each shoe. are scrupulously observed, fencers must wear their Maximum size: 4.5 x 2 cm or the normal name and their nationality written in capital insignia (e.g. stripes). letters, on their back or on the front of their thigh Glove: no trademark. on the side of the non-weapon arm. The letters Weapon: no trademark visible from any must not be taller than 10 cm and must be navy distance. blue. The article of equipment may not have any If the federation and/or the fencer has signed a distinctive trademark (stripe, design, border, sponsorship contract with a commercial or other etc.) other than those authorized above. company, a sponsor’s logo of 50 cm2 maximum Date of application: 1 January 1992 for the may be placed at the top of the fencing jacket trademarks of dimension 4.5 x 2 cm. sleeve (non-weapon arm) or on the side (left or 2. Ancillary equipment may carry the following right) of the breeches. For sabre, there may not be manufacturer’s trademarks: a logo on the sleeve. Warm-up suit: the normal nonverbal trade- The logos may not number more than two (and mark as it appears on all articles by the may be identical). same manufacturer (e.g. stripes for c) Warm-up suit and clothing Adidas) and one logo, maximum size 10 1. One advertisement is permitted on the back of x 10 cm, on the left-hand side of the chest the official warm-up suit of the national or the name, maximum size 10 x 4 cm, federation, between the shoulders: on the left-hand side of the chest. — either one line not exceeding 10 cm in Fencing bag: no limitation. height Sports bag: no limitation. — or a logo not exceeding 15 x 15 cm. B) Exploitation of a fencer’s image Furthermore, the logo of a sponsor of the a) Definition national federation or the weapon concerned This heading concerns advertising contracts that may be placed horizontally on the right side of propose: the front of the warm-up suit. This logo may — exploitation of the presence of a fencer not exceed the following dimensions: 50 cm2. — exploitation of the name of a fencer In addition, if the fencer has signed a sponsor- — exploitation of the likeness of a fencer ship contract with a corporation or other — exploitation of the statements of a fencer
1995 – 88 Rules for Competitions – USFA enterprise, the official warm-up suit may bear not more than 8 cm high by 8 cm wide. Only the same logos as the fencing uniform. the label of the current competition must be 2. Only the official warm-up suit of the national worn by foil and epee fencers. federation is allowed at the World Champion- 3. In both cases, the advertising, words or logo, ships (Cf. point 1). must be placed below the number and not At other competitions (except on the podium exceed 35 mm in height. at category “A” tournaments), advertising on c) The self-adhesive mask label and the leg band warm-up suits, robes and all other clothing is need not bear a number, and may be used exclu- without limitation, except as delineated by the sively for advertising. national federation to which the fencer belongs. V. Penalties 3. During the introduction of the finalists and A) Individual contract (IIIA and B) the awarding of prizes at the World Champi- In the case of nonobservance of the rules regarding onships and category “A” events, fencers must individual contracts, the penalty is suspension of the present themselves on the podium in fencing fencer according to the conditions of Article 87 of the uniform or complete official national warm-up Statutes. If, at the end of the period of suspension, the suit (jacket and pants) (Cf. point 1). The fencer again commits an infraction, he will lose his jacket must remain completely closed during amateur status and his license will be revoked. the entire official ceremony. B) Non-conforming trademark (IV.A-b) 1.) Fencers must present themselves on the strip — obligation to change immediately the article of dressed exclusively in complete, fastened equipment and fencing uniforms. — warning, then penalty, according to Article 635, d) Ancillary material 639, 641-3rd group Advertising is allowed without limitation on fencing bags and equipment bags. C) Advertising on clothing (IV.C-b) e) Television — obligation to change immediately the article of When a competition is being televised, the wishes equipment and of the television company are paramount, and the — application of Articles 635, 639, 641-3rd group organizers must make clear, in the conditions of (on the strip) or 633.j (off the strip). entry for the competition, if appropriate, the way D) Advertising not conforming to the rules or not in which advertising material worn or carried by authorized (IV.C-c) the fencers will be permitted — obligation to remove the offending article from D) Leg band or self-adhesive label view and a warning. a) Principles — in the case of a repetition of the offense in the 1. The organizers of a competition may identify course of the competition, application of Articles the fencers by issuing them with a number on 635, 639, 641-3rd group. a leg band or self-adhesive label. E) Leg bands and self-adhesive labels (IV-D) 2. The wearing of this band or label is then 1. A fencer who refuses to wear the leg band or label mandatory for the fencers. when its wearing has been duly announced 3. The self-adhesive label must be of a rough beforehand will be excluded from the competition material that will not cause the point to slip. and will not appear in the overall classification of 4. The leg band or self-adhesive label may have the event. on it advertising material within the limita- In addition, Articles 526 and those following will tions of the following rules. be applied as necessary. 5. The circular announcing the details of the 2. If the leg bands or labels do not conform to the competition must make clear what bands or rules, the organizers must withdraw them; if they labels the fencers are to wear, and what fail to do so, they are liable to a fine of US $500 to publicity will be on them. the national federation. Entering the competition implies an accep- If it is a competition that counts towards the World tance by the fencer of the obligation to wear Cup (Category “A”), the fine is US $1500 to the the band or label in question. FIE and the competition automatically loses its b) Position and size Category “A” status for the following year. 1. The leg band must be attached to the thigh on In the case of a repetition of the offense within 5 the side of the non-weapon arm. years, the fine is doubled and the competition will The maximum size of the leg band is 20 x 20 not appear on the International Calendar for 3 cm. The fencer’s number must be at least 10 years. cm high and 15 cm in width. F) Image advertising (IV-B) 2. The self-adhesive labels must be affixed to a) Penalties each side of the mask, on the lateral surfaces. 1. The first offense concerning exploitation of The maximum size of the label is 10 cm wide the fencer’s image other than by a properly by 15 cm high. The fencer’s number must be
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 89 executed contract is penalized by a warning from the national federation or the FIE. 2. The first repetition is penalized by a suspen- sion of 6 months. 3. The second repetition is penalized by a suspension of 1 year. 4. Any subsequent repetitions are penalized by a suspension of 2 years for each offense. b) Responsibility 1. The fencer concerned is assumed to be at fault. 2. If the fencer denies his responsibility for the offense, he must give the FIE every authority to proceed with the necessary investigations and must cede to the FIE his rights to act against the party guilty of misuse of his image. If he does not, point b) 1. above automatically applies. c) Competence and procedure 1. The FIE Central Office is the body competent to deal with these matters. 2. The parties concerned have a period of 30 days dating from reception of notification of the decision during which they may appeal to the Executive Committee. There can be no appeal regarding a decision by the Executive Committee (Cf. Article 614-a). 3. The suspension is effective from the time the decision is made definitive. 4. The FIE has the right to investigate and punish any offense on its own initiative. 5. The FIE will notify the national federations of all decisions that have become definitive. Updated 7/95
1995 – 90 Rules for Competitions – USFA The individual competition for each weapon Appendix B: consists of two phases: one preliminary and the other main, each being carried out in one FIE Temporary Provisions day of competition. Preliminary Phase Temporary Provision 1 The preliminary phase consists of a round of 1. As a result of the 1993 Congress in Paris, the pools, eliminating from 20 to 30% of the formats for the organization of official FIE participants in that round (according to their competitions are, beginning 1 October 1993, as overall ranking after the round of pools), and follows: a preliminary direct elimination table with no repechage. A) OLYMPIC GAMES From among those fencers actually present, a) The total participation shall not exceed 220 the top 16 fencers in the official FIE ranking fencers. as of the date of the World Championships are b) The individual competition will be held considered the “top seeds” and are exempt completely by direct elimination without from the preliminary phase. Confirmation of repechage, from beginning to end, with a the presence of these top seeds must be made direct elimination table (complete or incom- by each fencer directly, or through his or her plete) of 64 fencers. chief of delegation. For the placement of fencers in this table, an In the case of a tie in the official FIE ranking initial ranking will be established according to between two or more fencers for the 16th the following rules: exempted place, a random selection will be 1') The highest places in this ranking will be made to determine which of these fencers will occupied in order by the fencers appear- benefit from exemption from the preliminary ing on the official FIE ranking as of the phase. date of the Olympic Games. In drawing up the pools the principle of 2') There may not be ties in this initial protection of nationality, as well as (so far as ranking. If fencers actually participating is possible) the principle of homogeneity, must in the competition are tied in the official be taken into account. The number of fencers FIE ranking as of the date of the Olympic should be seven, unless using pools of six Games, their relative ranking will be better follows these principles. Otherwise, the determined randomly [before the compe- pools will be of seven and six fencers. tition starts]. A pool bout is finished when: 3') Any fencers not having an official FIE • one of the fencers has scored five touches, ranking will be placed randomly in the or remaining positions in the initial ranking. • four minutes of actual fencing time have Fencers are placed in the table randomly in elapsed. There will be no warning for the pairs, according to the initial ranking [1-2 or final minute. 2-1; 3-4 or 4-3; etc.]. In the case of a tie at the end of regulation The principle of protection by nationality will time, before allowing an additional minute to not be applied when setting up this table. decide between the two fencers by the first c) The team competition is open, in each decisive touch, the referee will randomly weapon, to the participation of a maximum of designate which fencer will be the winner 12 teams, each composed of three fencers. The should the tie persist after the additional participating teams will be placed in an minute. After this random selection, and incomplete direct elimination table of 16, before the bout recommences, a visible taking their relative places according to the indication (in writing or by a light) of which sum of the points of the team members in the fencer has the priority must be made. official FIE ranking after the individual The score shall be noted on the scoresheet as competition of the Olympic Games. In the follows: case of a tie, teams will be ranked randomly. V 5 – D 4: If a touch is scored during the d) Apart from the particulars stated here, the time of the bout, rules to be applied are the same as those for V 5 – D 5: a) If the random selection the World Championships. chose the winner, or b) If in epee the score was 5/5 B) SENIOR WORLD CHAMPIONSHIPS at the expiration of the time a) Participation in the Senior World Champion- of the bout. ships is limited to four fencers per weapon per The highest 16 fencers in the overall ranking country, and one team per weapon per after the round of pools are exempt from the country. preliminary table. In the case of a tie between b) Format for individual competitions: two or more fencers for the 16th place, they
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 91 will be separated by a five touch barrage The 32 fencers advancing from the prelimi- (maximum time four minutes). nary table take places 33 to 64 in this table. A direct elimination table without repechage The principle of protection of nationality will will be drawn up for the remaining fencers not be applied when drawing up this table. advancing from the pools; the fencers will be The direct elimination bouts are for 15 placed in the table according to their overall touches, with a maximum time of nine ranking from the pools. This table, complete minutes, divided into three periods of three or incomplete, will be fenced until only 32 minutes, with one minute of rest between fencers remain. periods. During this minute, a coach desig- The principle of protection of nationality will nated before the bout can address the fencer. not be applied when drawing up this table. The scoring apparatus blocks itself at the end The direct elimination bouts are for 15 of each three minute period. There is no touches, with a maximum time of nine warning for the final minute. minutes, divided into three periods of three The bout ends when: minutes, with one minute of rest between • one of the fencers has scored 15 touches, periods. During this minute, a coach desig- or nated before the bout can address the fencer. • nine minutes of actual fencing time have The scoring apparatus blocks itself at the end elapsed. of each three minute period. There is no The fencer having scored the greater number warning for the final minute. of touches is declared the winner. The bout ends when: In the case of a tie at the end of regulation • one of the fencers has scored 15 touches, time, before allowing an additional minute to or decide between the two fencers by the first • nine minutes of actual fencing time have decisive touch, the referee will randomly elapsed. designate which fencer will be the winner The fencer having scored the greater number should the tie persist after the additional of touches is declared the winner. minute. After this random selection, and In the case of a tie at the end of regulation before the bout recommences, a visible time, before allowing an additional minute to indication (in writing or by a light) of which decide between the two fencers by the first fencer has the priority must be made. decisive touch, the referee will randomly In this case, the score shall be noted on the designate which fencer will be the winner scoresheet as V/14. should the tie persist after the additional c) Team competition minute. After this random selection, and 1' The competition is carried out completely before the bout recommences, a visible by direct elimination; the table may be indication (in writing or by a light) of which incomplete. fencer has the priority must be made. Teams are placed in the table in order of In this case, the score shall be noted on the their points. The number of points for scoresheet as V/14. each team is calculated by adding the Main Phase points earned by each of the three team The main phase consists of a direct elimina- members most highly placed in the tion table without repechage, run on four official FIE rankings following the strips, one quarter of the table on each strip. individual competition at the World However, for reasons having to do with the Championships. organization of the competition, the first 2' All places down to 16th will be fenced round of the table of 64 may be run on eight off. 17th place and below will be deter- strips. mined by the seeding of the teams into The top seeds exempted from the preliminary the table. phase take places 1 to 16 in this table, 3' The format will be as follows: randomly in pairs, in order of their official 3.1 A relay format will be used for each FIE ranking. weapon. In the case of the absence of a top-seeded 3.2 Each team is composed of three fencer whose participation was confirmed the fencers with or without a substitute, day before the competition, that place in the each of whom will fence the three table will remain empty, and the fencer’s opposing fencers (nine relays). federation will be obliged to pay the FIE a 3.3 The bouts of each match are fenced 1,000 F fine. in the following order: The top 16 fencers after the round of pools 3-6, 5-1, 2-4, 6-1, 3-4, 5-2, 1-4, 6-2, (those exempted from the preliminary table) 3-5 take places 17 to 32 in this table, in order of 3.4 The teams are placed on the score- their ranking. sheet in random order; then the team
1995 – 92 Rules for Competitions – USFA captain determines the order of the In drawing up the pools for the Cadet World fencers. Championships, the bout committee takes into 3.5 Substitution of fencers is as provided account the following, in order: for FIE team competitions. 1/ the top eight at the previous year’s Cadet 3.6 The relays are fenced to multiples of World Championships, five touches (5-10-15-20-etc.); the 2/ the first 64 fencers in the Junior World maximum time for each relay is four Cup standings, minutes. 3/ the fencers placing 9th through 32nd at 3.7 The two first fencers fence until one the previous year’s Cadet World Champi- has reached a score of five touches, onships, within a maximum time of four 4/ the fencers ranked 65th to last place in minutes. the Junior World Cup standings, The next two opponents fence to ten 5/ the rankings established by the national touches, within a maximum time of federations, four minutes, and so on in successive 6/ the decision of the bout committee. relays of five touches. Direct Elimination 3.8 If the intended score for a relay has The top 16 qualifiers from the pools are not been reached by the end of four placed in order in positions 1 through 16 of a minutes, the following two fencers direct elimination table that need not be start with the existing score and complete. The remaining fencers are placed in fence to the score intended for the the table according to the results of the pools next relay, within a maximum of four (Note: the random placement within groups of minutes. four was revoked by the 1995 Congress). This 3.9 The winning team is that which first direct elimination table is fenced straight reaches the maximum score of 45 through without repechage to the finals. Each touches (9 x 5 touches), or that which quarter of the table will be contested on one has scored more touches at the end of strip; the direct elimination from 32 will be regulation time. contested on four strips. 3.10 In the case of a tied score at the end The principle of protection of nationality is of regulation time for the final relay, not applied when drawing up the table. one additional minute will be given The bouts in the direct elimination and in the to the last two fencers to fence for a finals follow the same rules as for the Senior decisive touch. Before restarting the World Championships. bout, the referee will randomly c) Format for team competitions: determine which fencer will be the A Youth Team World Championship is held winner should the tie persist at the during the Junior and Cadet World Champi- end of the final minute. After this onships, at the same time and place, the day random selection, and before the bout following the last individual final. recommences, a visible indication (in Each team consists of five fencers, one from writing or by a light) of which fencer each weapon, and may include five substitutes has the priority must be made. (one for each weapon). The five team mem- 3.11 If a fencer and the possible substitute bers, as well as the five substitutes, may be are forced to withdraw, or if a fencer either juniors or cadets. is excluded, their team loses the The team captain will register the names of match. the five team members, as well as any substitutes, the evening before the competi- C) JUNIOR AND CADET WORLD tion. CHAMPIONSHIPS The competition will be run entirely by direct a) The individual competition takes place in one elimination, with a complete or incomplete day per weapon. table, from beginning to end. b) Format of the individual competition: Teams are seeded into to the table based on Round of Pools the sum of the points earned in the individual All fencers present participate in a round of competitions by the fencers named to the pools of seven or of six fencers if the pools team. If a fencer competed in both the junior can be even, or of pools of seven and six if and cadet championships, he is awarded they cannot, to eliminate 20 to 30% of the points for the higher result. For this purpose, fencers according to an overall classification. the scale of points is the same for cadets as for The principle of protection of nationality is juniors. applied when creating the pools. In the case of a tie in points between two or The pool bouts follow the same rules as for more teams, they will be placed in the table in the Senior World Championships. random order.
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 93 The first four places will be contested; the Temporary Provision 2 other teams will be ranked after the competi- During the 1993-94 season and until scoring tion within each round of the table according machines include a system for blocking the to their original seed into the table. colored light after the illumination of the white Each match will be fenced to 25 touches, light on the same side as provided in Article 229, divided into five sections of five touches, one machines using the old system of blockage remain for each weapon. acceptable for use. The order in which the weapons will be fenced will be randomly determined before the match. Temporary Provision 3 The two fencers in the first weapon will fence Rules for the until one (or both) has reached a score of five, Senior Team World Cup within four minutes of fencing time. The two fencers in the second weapon will start with Competitions the score attained by the first two fencers and 1. The Senior Team World Cup is contested accord- fencer until one (or both) has reached a score ing to the following rules. of ten, within four minutes of fencing time, 2. Each organizer of the Senior World Cup may and so on up to 25 touches. organize a team competition the day following the When four minutes of fencing time have individual competition. expired in a given section within one (or both) 3. The team must be entered at the same time the fencer’s having reached the maximum individual entries are submitted. number of touches for that section (5, 10, 15, 4. The competition will only be held if at least five 20, or 25 touches), the score of each team is teams are entered. incremented equally until the leading team 5. A team consists of three fencers of the same has a score equal to the maximum number of nationality, with or without a substitute. touches for that section. 6. Team composition may be modified during the A team member may only be replaced by a fencing season. substitute in the case of an injury confirmed 7. The first eight places will always be completely by the FIE Medical Commission delegate. fenced out. Only one substitute per fencer is allowed World Cup points will be awarded according to the during the competition. current rules for the first eight finishers. If, as a result of a new injury confirmed by the Teams finishing 9 through 16: 8 points. Medical Commission delegate, a substitute Teams finishing 17 through 32: 4 points. cannot finish the bout that he has started, as 8. For the Team World Cup standings, the best four well as in the case of withdrawal of a fencer results will be counted, with a maximum of three during the bout, the score of that fencer’s results earned in the same continental zone. team remains as it was at the time of the 9. Teams are seeded into the table in order of points: injury or withdrawal, and the score of the Each team’s points are calculated by summing the opposing team is incremented by the number points earned by each of the three best-placed team of points necessary to reach the maximum for members in the official FIE standings before the that section. individual competition held the day before the A team may only begin a match with five team competition. fencers. 10. Organizers must submit their candidacy with the In the case of a tie at the end of regulation same forms and deadlines as for the individual time, the rules for the Senior World Champi- Category “A” competitions. onship team competitions must be applied For the 1994-95 season, the entry deadline is (Temporary Provision 1, section 1 B) c) 3.10). August 31, 1994. D) CATEGORY “A” COMPETITIONS Temporary Provision 4 a) Senior Category “A” competitions follow the Sabre scoring machines that function without same rules as the individual competitions at sensors (capteurs) are authorized on a experimen- the Senior World Championships. tal basis for the 1994-95 season. A definite b) Junior Category “A” competitions follow the decision will be made at the 1995 Congress same rules as the individual competitions at concerning the use of sensors during the 1995-96 the Junior and Cadet World Championships. season. 2. Until the reorganization of the Rules for Competi- tion, the Statutes, and the FIE Administrative Note: The 1995 Congress voted to remove the sensor Rules, the rules listed above have precedence over effective October 1, 1996. Tournaments held during the the articles of the Rules: 45 to 47, 49, 225, 226, 1995-96 season may be fenced with or without a 319 to 321, 413, 414, 514 to 584; of the Statutes: sensor. 119 to 121; and of the Administrative Rules: Chapter II, A) § 2.
1995 – 94 Rules for Competitions – USFA Arm (unarmed), 28, 30, 641/1st grp. INDEX Armband (national colors), 27/3, 641/1st grp. Numbers refer to Articles of the Rules. Armorers – see Technicians Numbers preceded by PC refer to sections of the Assault, 4, 28. Fencers’ Publicity Code Assistance (medical and technical), 611. Accelerometer – see Sabre (sensor) Attention (of judges) – see Judges (attention) Accident, 16, 50, 63, 520, 558, 562. Attacks, 10f., 233ff, 417ff. Accident (responsibility), 16. Auxiliary personnel, 59ff, 204, 305, 508. Accidental events, 44, 231/5, 327j, 520. Avoiding actions – see Actions (evasive) Acknowledgment of touches – see Touches Award (of touch) – see Touches (awarding) (acknowledgment of) Back – see Valid surface, and Turning Actions: Barrages, 523f., 531, 537, 548, 551, 555, 564. – abnormal, 28, 641/1st grp. – order of, 523. – composed (compound), 11. Barrel – see Point – dangerous, 28, 641/2nd grp. – defensive, 10, 30. Batteries: – evasive, 35, 43, 237/1b, 422/1b. – dry cell, 729. – offensive, 10ff, 30, 32. – storage, 709, 716, 729. – simple, 11. Bib – see Mask (bib) – simultaneous, 237, 422, 423. BLACK CARD – see CARD (BLACK) – vindictive, 20, 605, 641/2nd grp. Blade, 23f., 207, 308, 406, 720f., 733. Advertising: – broken, 231/4f, 327h. – manufacture of electrical apparatus, 705. – curve, 207, 308, 406. – worn, carried, PC IIIC, IVC, IVD. – flexibility of, 207, 308, 406. Age of competitors – see Competitors (age of) – grinding, 22, 207, 308, 406. Alcohol, 608/2n, 608/4. – threading, 720, 733. Amateurism: Body cord, 21, 209, 217, 309, 314, 327f, 425, 710, – competitors – see Competitors (amateurism) 712, 717, 722, 730. – judges – see Judges (amateurism) Bout, 4, 28ff. Annulment of touches – see Touches (annulment of) – commencement, 32. – deciding, 225, 319, 413, 544. Annulment of penalty – see Penalties (annulment of) – direction of, 53ff. Anti-blockage system, 713, 751ff. – duration, 32, 45ff, 59, 225f., 319ff, 413f., 534, Apparatus (electrical), 60, 201, 204, 227ff, 304f., 545, 549, 553, 555, 555A. 322ff, 701ff, 713ff, 723, 741ff. – interruption of, 46, 48ff, 520, 641/1st grp. – approval, 703ff. – re-starting, 32, 231/3a, 327d. – drawing of, 703. – stopping, 32, 38ff, 45ff, 63, 223, 411. – epee, 701ff, 723ff. Bout committee, 57, 505ff, 581, 590, 610, 613ff, 617, – foil, 701ff, 713ff, 741ff, 751ff. 618. – inspection of, 708. Bouts (order of), 50, 518ff, 523, 540, 547, 553ff, 554A, – priority of touches, 713, 724. 555A, 557. – prototype, 704. – publicity by makers, 705. Breaking blade – see Blade (broken) – regularity, 714. Breast protectors, 27/4, 215, 315. – resistance, 710f., 712/3, 714, 725,743, 744. Breeches, 27/5, 215, PC IIIA/b1. – sabre, 761ff. Brutality, 28, 641/4th grp. – sensitivity, 714, 725, 744. Button, 210, 406. – table for, 204, 305. – covering, 210. – technicians, 60c, 580e. – tests, 71, 231, 327, 703ff, 708, 714/8. Cables (overhead), 702, 710/7. – timing, 724, 744. Candidature – types of, 701. – World Championships, 571. Appeal: – Under-20 Championships, 586. – against decision, 505f, 506, 614, 615e, 617f., – Cadet Championships, 594. 661f., PC IVF. CARD – frivolous, 506f, 614. – BLACK, 635, 639f., 641. – right of, 614. – RED, 635, 637ff, 641. – ultimate, 614, 617ff, 621. – YELLOW, 635, 637f., 641. – unjustified, 641/1st grp, 661. Censure, 633A. Application of rules – see Rules (application of) Central scoring machine – see Apparatus (electrical)
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 95 Central Office (FIE), 504, 506/4b, 507, 581f., 613, Conventions: 617f., 621, 634. – foil, 232ff. Championship (definition), 7. – epee, 316ff. Changing ends – see Ends (competitors changing) – sabre, 416ff. Changing hands – see Hand (changing) Coquille – see Guard Classification: Corps à corps, 34, 37, 224, 318, 412, 641/1st grp. – fencers, 517, 521, 524, 531, 535, 537, 541, 548, Correctness of the touch – see Touches (correctness of) 550, 555, 554Aff. Counter-attack, 12. – teams, 559ff, 567ff. Counter-riposte, 10. Clothing, 27, 212ff, 315, 408, PC IIIC, IVC. Counter-time, 13. Coaches (instructors), 611. Coupé, 11, 233/5, 418/3. Collar: Court of Appeal, 506, 613f., 618, 621. – jacket, 27/2, 315. – President, 506. – metallic vest, 216. Courtesy, 28, 602. Collusion, 607, 641/4th grp. Covering point – see Point (covering) Commission for Electrical Apparatus and Equipment Covering target – see Valid surface (covering) (FIE), 17, 60, 509, 703ff, 708, 714/8&10, 720, 722/ Cross bar (on handle), 25. 3c, 733. Current (electrical - source and voltage), 702/4, 706, Commutation of penalty – see Penalties (commutation 709, 716, 729, 746. of) Curve of blade – see Blade (curve) Competence, 613ff, 636, PC IVF/c. Cutover – see Coupé Competition: – definition, 6. Cuts: – individual, 514ff, 570ff. – back edge, 409. – team, 557ff. – sabre, 409. Competitions: Dangerous fencing – see Fencing (dangerous) – events, 6, 501, 514, 557ff, 564, 573, 580, 591. Deciding bout – see Bout (deciding) – official FIE, 1, 17, 27, 45, 56, 58f., 201, 227, 301, Deciding touch – see Touch (deciding) 304, 322, 501, 507, 509, 565, 570, 585, 614, 622, Defeats (double) – see Epee (double defeats) 708f., 715. Defence (right of), 663, PC IVF/b. Competitors: – age of, 6, 588. Defensive actions – see Actions (defensive) – amateurism, 619, 652, PC IVA. Deliberations: – obligations of, 603ff. – of jury, 45, 62ff. – positions of, 31. – juridical authorities, 664. – reversal of, 31, 35. Deposit: Composed actions – see Actions (composed) – for appeals, 506, 614. Composition of pools – see Pools (composition) – for check on drug test, 608/1n. Compound actions – see Actions (composed) Dimensions: – strip – see Strip (dimensions) Confirmation of penalty – see Penalties (confirmation – weapons – see Weapons (dimensions) of) Direct elimination, 6, 514, 542ff, 549ff, 555A, 556f., Confiscation of equipment – see Equipment (confisca- 564ff, 583. tion of) – formats, 514, 542, 549f., 554Aff, 564ff. Confused fencing – see Fencing (confused) Direct touches – see Touches (direct) Congress of FIE, 614, 622, 667, 714/10. Direction of bout – see Bout (direction of) Connectors (plugs), 23/3, 217, 314, 327, 702, 710, Director (of Bout) – see President (of the Jury) 712, 717, 722, 730. Disciplinary authorities, 613ff. Contact: – between weapon and metallic vest, 71, 230, 641/ Disciplinary code, 601ff. 1st grp, 743ff. Discipline, 602. – of blades, 237, 422/2a. Disengagement, 11, 233ff, 417ff. – between fencers – see Corps à corps Dishonest fencing – see Fencing (dishonest) Contract: Displacement (of body), 35, 222. – exploitation of image, PC II, IIIB, IVA. Displacing target – see Valid surface (displacing) – position of fencer, PC IIC, IVA. Disqualification, 615, 617, 623, 632, PC IIC. – wearing publicity material, PC IIIAff, IVC. Distance between fencers, 31, 36f., 43. Control by FIE, 504, 570, 582, 585. Disturbing order – see Order (disturbing) Doping, 608, 641/4th grp.
1995 – 96 Rules for Competitions – USFA Double defeats – see Epee (double defeats) Fatigue (competitor), 511ff. Double touches – see Touches (double) Faults: Doubtful touches – see Touches (doubtful) – in apparatus, 60, 71, 231, 326, 327. Drawing lots, 517/2, 523, 550. – in equipment, 21, 71, 231, 326f., 641. Drawn match – see Match (drawn) – localization of, 231/4d, 327c. Drugs – see Doping Favoring opponent, 607, 641/4th grp. Ducking, 35, 237, 422. Feints, 233, 235, 417, 419. Duration of bout – see Bout (duration) Fencers: – definition, 601. Eccentric mounting (of guard), 208, 310. – obligations, 603ff. Elbow guard, 408/3. Fencing: Electric epee – see Epee (electrical) – at close quarters, 33. Electric foil – see Foil (electrical) – bag, PC IIIA/b2, IIIC/c2. – confused, 28, 32/2, 231/7. Electric sabre – see Sabre (electrical) – dangerous, 28, 32, 641/2nd grp. Electrical apparatus – see Apparatus (electrical) – dishonest, 28, 641/3rd grp. Electrical current – see Current (electrical) – incorrect, 28, 605ff, 641. Electrical equipment – see Equipment (electrical) – method of, 28ff, 219, 316, 409, 605, 641. Electrical weapons – see Weapons (electrical) – time, 9, 236f., 421ff. Eliminating rounds, 516ff, 521, 531, 535ff. Field of play (terrain), 14ff, 201ff, 301ff, 401ff. Elimination tables, 556. Finals, 58, 512f., 515, 524, 531, 541, 548, 555, 555A, Ends (competitors changing), 31f., 545. 569. Entries (FIE competitions), 510, 572, 575, 578, 587. Flèches, 28, 35, 37, 43, 69/4, 224, 318, 412, 641/1st Epee, 301ff. grp. – apparatus, 701ff, 723ff. Flexibility (blade) – see Blade (flexibility) – double defeats, 321, 521, 524, 537f., 541, 545, Floor cords, 702, 710, 717, 730. 551, 555, 555A, 560. Floor judges – see Judges (floor/ground) – electrical, 306ff, 712, 731ff. Foil, 201ff. – equipment (weapons), 306ff, 731ff. – apparatus, 701ff, 713ff, 741ff, 751ff. – length, 307. – use of, 227. – nonelectric, 29, 316. – electrical, 211, 712, 718ff. – time (double touches) 329, 330. – equipment (weapons), 205ff, 712, 718ff. – weight, 306. – length, 206. Equipment: – nonelectric, 29, 219. – advertising on, PC IIIC, IVD. – weight, 205. – confiscation of, 21, 641. Follow phrase (ability to) – see Phrase (ability to – electrical, 701ff. follow) – definition, 702. Fortuitous circumstances, 44, 231/5, 327j, 520. – seizing with unarmed hand, 30, 641/1st grp. – fencers’, 16ff, 27, 205ff, 306ff, 404ff, 718ff, Gaining ground – see Ground (gaining or losing) 731ff. Gauge, 20, 25, 208, 310, 407. – inspection of, 17ff, 21, 708. Glossary, 3ff. – irregular, 18, 21ff, 231, 326, 641. Glove, 27, 213, 408, 427, PC IIIA/b1. Evasive actions – see Actions (evasive) Grinding of blades – see Blade (grinding) Events – see Competitions Ground (gaining or losing), 36f., 39ff, 43, 623f.. Exceptions to rules, 2. Ground judges – see Judges (floor/ground) Exclusion (competitor), 21a/3e, 615b, 623, 627ff, 635/ Grounding: 3, 641/3rd & 4th grps, PC IVBff. – guard, 327g, 726. Executive committee – see Bout committee – strip, 201, 304, 711. Experts (electrical apparatus), 60b, 71/5, 508d. – warning lights, 727/4. Expulsion, 615c, 623b, 633, 635/3, 641/3rd & 4th Guaranty – see Deposit grps, PC IV. Guard: Extension of valid target – see Valid surface (extension – hitting with, 409, 641/1st & 2nd grps. of) – lines, 14, 31, 203. – of weapon, 23f., 26, 208, 310, 326a, 327g, 497, Fact (decision on), 614c. 712, 726. Failure to appear on time, 604, 641/1st & 4th grps. – padding in, 23/3, 26/2, 712/1. Fall (flèche ending in), 28, 224, 318, 412, 641/1st grp. – placing fencers on, 31, 37, 43. Falsification (of inspection marks), 21a/3, 641/3rd grp.
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 97 – replacing fencers on, 32/3, 36f., 43, 226b, 237/3, Labels (self adhesive), PC IIID, IVE. 320, 414, 422/3. Lamé – see Vest (metallic) Hair (covering valid surface), 30, 641/1st grp. Leaving the strip – see Strip (leaving) Halt, 32, 45ff. Leg band/label, PC IIID, IVE. Hand: Lighting stroke – see Point (lighting stroke) – armed, 28, 30. Lights: – changing, 30. – control, 716/2, 727/3. – unarmed, 28, 30, 641/1st grp. – electrical, 709, 715, 727. Handle, 23ff, 211b, 641/2nd grp, 721. – extension, 702, 709, 715, 747. – grounding warning, 727/4. Hilt – see Handle – warning, 716/2, 727/3. Hits – see Touches – yellow, 71/2, 230, 714f., 741ff, 754ff. Honor (pledge of), 55, 603. Limits of strip – see Strip (limits of) Image (exploitation of), PC IIIB, IVF. Line: Immediate touch – see Touches (immediate) – center, 31, 203. Impartiality (judges) – see Judges (impartiality of) – on guard, 31, 203. – point in – see Point in line In line (fencer) – see Point in line – rear, 39f., 203. Increase of penalties – see Penalties (increase of) Lining (sleeve) – see Sleeve (lining) Indicators, 517, 560, 561. Localization of faults – see Faults (localization of) – table, 517. Locking nut, 23/2, 24/6. Individual events – see Competition (individual) Loss of ground – see Ground (gaining or losing) Initiation of touches – see Touches (initiated) Injury, 22, 30, 50, 641/2nd grp. Machines (scoring) – see Apparatus (electrical) Inquiry, 663. Maintenance of order – see Order (maintenance of) Inspection equipment, 20. Martingale, 209, 309. Inspection markings (absence of), 21a/3a, 641/2nd grp. Mask, 27, 30, 214, 218, 313, 408, 426, 641/1st grp, Inspection of equipment – see Equipment (inspection 722, PC IIIA/b1. of) – bib, 27, 214, 221, 313, 408. Instructors – see Coaches – covering valid surface, 30, 641/1st grp. Insulation: – mesh, 27, 722. – electric foil, 211b, 721, 752, 753. – removal of, 28, 641/1st grp. – guard, 726. Match, 5, 557, 559ff, 564. – strip, 201, 304, 711. – drawn, 559. Integrity, 28, 602f., 605, 607. Materiality of touches – see Touches (materiality) International Olympic Committee (IOC), 505, 613, Medical Commission (FIE), 509, 608. 619, PC I. Metallic strip – see Strip (metallic) Interruption (of bout) – see Bout (interruption) Metallic vest (plastron) – see Vest (metallic) Investigation, 663. Method of fencing – see Fencing (method of) Mixed format, 534, 549, 565. Jacket, 27, 212, 315, 408, PC IIIA/b1. Mounting weapons – see Weapons (mounting) – metallic (sabre), 424. Jostling, 28, 34, 224, 318, 412, 641/1st grp. National armband – see Armband (national colors) Judges, 54ff, 62ff, 68, 69. National federation, 516, 571, 575, 586, 613, 620, 634. – amateurism, 56. Nationality (fencers), 517, 519, 535, 552ff, 555A. – attention, 55, 610. Neutralization – see Grounding – floor/ground, 54ff, 71f., 74, 610. Neutrality of judges – see Judges (neutral) – impartiality of, 55, 610, 652/3. Non-regulation equipment – see Equipment (irregular) – licenses for, 56. – neutral, 31, 57. Number of touches – see Touches (number of) – partiality, 55, 610. Number of fencers: – positions of, 62, 63. – pool – see Pools (number of fencers) Judging of touches – see Touches (judging of) – teams – see Teams (composition of) Juridical authorities, 613, 660. Obedience, 602, 641/1st grp. Jurisdiction (principles), 614, 660. Observance of fencing phrase – see Phrase (observance Jury, 54ff, 62, 227, 415, 507ff, 610. of) Jury of Appeal, 506, 613f., 618, 621. Offenses, 641. – committed while fencing, 624ff, 641. Knickers – see Breeches – regarding discipline, 641.
1995 – 98 Rules for Competitions – USFA – regarding order, 641/3rd grp. – spring, 18, 71/2, 211, 311, 719, 732. – regarding sportsmanship, 641/4th grp. – travel, 18, 21, 26e, 71/2, 210f., 311, 719, 732. – regarding strip, 624ff. Point in line, 32 (note), 233, 237, 418, 422. – repetition of, 666. Points system (for seeding teams), 567ff. Offensive actions – see Actions (offensive) Pommel, 23f., 25, 211b, 721. Official competition of the FIE – see Competitions Pool, 6, 515ff, 534ff, 549ff, 557ff, 565ff. (official FIE) Pools: Olympic Games, 1, 505f., 584, 613, 619, 634, PC I, II. – composition: On guard – see Guard – individual events, 516ff, 535, 536. Order: – team events, 566ff. – disturbing, 602, 612, 641/3rd grp. – number of fencers, 515, 534. – maintenance of, 53, 615. Poolsheets – see Scoresheets Order of: Positions of: – barrages – see Barrages (order of) – competitors – see Competitors (positions of) – bouts – see Bouts (order of) – judges – see Judges (positions of) – events – see Timetable Preliminary rounds, 516ff, 537ff, 550ff. Orders of President, 31f., 615, 641/1st grp. Pre-Olympic competition, PC I. Organizing (method of), 511ff, 557. Presence on time, 604, 641/1st & 4th grps. Organizing committee, 503, 613, 616, 634. President (of the Jury) – see Referee Overriding vote (referee), 69. Priority (between touches) – see Touches (priority Padding (guard) – see Guard (padding in) between) Pardon – see Penalties (pardon) Priority of touches (electrical apparatus) – see Appara- tus (electrical - priority of touches) Parry, 10, 233ff, 417ff. Promotion (fencers), 522f., 531, 539, 551. Partiality (judges) – see Judges (partiality) Protests, 614, 617ff, 661, 662. Passing the opponent, 35. Protection (of fencers), 27, 212ff, 315, 408. Penalties, 623ff, 635ff. – announcement of, 634. Prototype (apparatus) – see Apparatus (electrical - – annulment of, 621. prototype) – committed while fencing, 624ff. Publicity code, 602, PC Iff. – commutation of, 667. Punctuality – see Presence on time – disciplinary, 628ff. Putting on guard – see Guard (placing fencers on) – extension of, 617. – increase of, 617, 621. Qualification (fencers), 522f., 531, 539, 551. – pardon, 667. Readiness on time – see Presence on time – procedure, 660ff. RED CARD – see CARD (RED) – publicity code, PC IV. – remission of, 667. Redoublement, 13b, 237/1c, 422/1c. – reprieve, 665. Reels, 35, 217, 314, 702, 710, 717, 730. – suspension of decision, 614. Referee, 3, 18f., 53, 61, 71, 615, 661. Penalty (one touch), 615, 626, 635/2. – control duties, 18f., 71, 231, 327f., 615. – see also CARD (RED) – direction duties, 53, 61, 63ff, 71ff, 615. Permanent suspension – see Suspension (permanent) – disciplinary duties, 53, 613, 615, 617. – judging duties, 53, 61, 67ff, 72ff, 228ff, 237, Personal effort, 607, 641/4th grp. 324ff, 416ff, 422. Phrase: Refusal to award touch – see Touches (refusal to – ability to follow, 33, 61. award) – observance of, 233ff, 417ff. Registration of touches – see Touches (registration of) Plastron: – foil over-jacket – see Vest (metallic) Remise, 13, 237/1c, 422/1c. – protective, under jacket, 19, 21, 27, 212, 315, Remission of penalty – see Penalties (remission of) 408. Repairers – see Technicians – sabre over-jacket – see Jacket (metallic) Repechage, 549ff, 554, 554A. Plugs – see Connectors Repetition of offense – see Offenses (repetition of) Point, 23/1, 210f., 311, 719ff, 732, 733. Replacement (of team competitor) – see Substitutes – covering, 210. (fencers) – fixing to weapon, 720, 733. Replacement (on guard) – see Guard (replacing on) – lighting stroke, 18, 211, 311, 719, 732. Reprise, 13, 237/1c, 422/1c. – loose (epee), 327g. Reserves – see Substitutes (fencers) – on the strip, 211, 316, 641/1st grp.
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 99 Resistance (electrical), 710, 712, 714, 725, 726. Specifications (weapons) – see Weapons (specifica- Respectfulness, 603. tions) Responsibility: Spectators, 204, 305, 612. – accident – see Accident (responsibility) Sponsor, PC IIA/b1. – material, 17. Spools – see Reels Rest: Sports bag, PC IIIA/b2. – competitor, 511ff, 518, 545, 547. Sportsmanship, 602, 607, 641/3rd grp. – granting of, 50, 51. Spring (in point) – see Point (spring) Rest period (between bouts), 518, 545, 547, 553, 555A. Starting bout – see Bout (commencement) Result (established), 561. Stay of execution – see Penalties (stay of execution) Retirement (during competition) – see Withdrawal Stateless persons, 519c. (competitor or team) Stimulant – see Doping Reversal of competitors – see Competitors (reversal of) Stockings – see Socks Riposte, 10ff, 234f., 419ff. Stop hit, 12, 236f., 422. Rules: – application of, 1. Stopping bout – see Bout (stopping) – special, 1, 2, 227, 652. Storage batteries – see Batteries (storage) Stretching of strip – see Strip (stretching) Sabre, 401ff. Strip, 15, 201ff, 301ff, 401ff. – apparatus, 761ff. – dimensions, 15, 202. – body cord, 425. – leaving, 32ff, 35, 38ff, 641/1st grp. – electrical, 415, 424ff, 761ff. – length, 15, 41, 202. – glove (electric), 427. – limits of: – length, 404. – crossing, 38ff. – mask (electric), 426. – lateral, 43. – metallic jacket, 424. – rear, 39f, 203. – nonelectric, 29, 415. – metallic, 15, 54, 201ff, 231/8, 302ff, 328, 401, – sensor, 763f.. 702/3, 711, 743f., 756, 758. – weapon (electric), 428. – placing of point on – see Point (on the strip) – weight, 405. – repair, 231/8, 328, 711/6. Safety, 16, 27, 212ff, 313ff, 408. – retreating on, 39f., 203. Salute, 28. – stretching, 711. Scoreboard, 59, 508a. – tearing, 231/8, 327i, 328, 711/6. Scorers, 59, 204, 305, 508a. – width, 202,. Scoresheets, 59, 508. Stroke (of point) – see Point (lighting stroke) Scoring machines – see Apparatus (electrical) Substitutes: Security measures, 16, 27, 212ff, 313ff, 408. – fencers, 558, 562. Security (system of attachment), 217, 314, 710/4. – Jury of Appeal, 506. Seeding, 516f., 535, 543, 555A, 566ff. Substitution of valid surface– see Valid surface (substitution of) SEMI Commission (FIE) – see Commission for Electrical Apparatus and Equipment (FIE) Superintendent of apparatus, 60a, 508c. Sensor – see Sabre (sensor) Supporters, 611. Shoulder – see Turning Surface (valid) – see Valid surface Side-stepping, 35. Suspension, 614, 615, 617, 623, 630f., PC IVD, F. – permanent, 617e, 623b, 631. Signals: – temporary, 623b, 630. – light, 709, 713/2, 727, 745. – sound, 46, 709, 713/3, 728, 745. Suspension of decision – see Penalties (suspension of decision) Simple actions – see Actions (simple). System (mixed), 534ff, 549ff, 565ff. Simultaneous actions – see Actions (simultaneous) – with final by direct elimination, 554A, 555A. Sleeve (lining of), 212, 315, 408. Socks: Table (for scoring machine), 204, 305. – national colors on, 27/5. Tang (of blade), 23. – publicity on, PC IIIA/b1. Target – see Valid surface Soldering (strip repair), 231, 328, 711. Teams: Source of current – see Current (electrical - source and – captain, 558, 609, 618. voltage) – composition of, 558. Specialists, 60, 508. – events, 557ff, 574ff.
1995 – 100 Rules for Competitions – USFA Technicians, 60c, 508e, 611, 641. Undergarment – see Plastron (protective) Television, PC I/4, IIIC/d. Uninsulated part of weapon on metallic vest, 230, 641/ Terrain – see Field of play 1st grp. Tests: Unplugging, 71/3, 231/4, 327, 712. – apparatus – see Apparatus (electrical - tests) Use of unarmed hand – see Hand (unarmed) – weapons – see Weapons (tests) Threading (blade) – see Blade (threading) Valid surface, 220ff, 317, 410. – covering, 30, 411, 641/1st grp. Throwing weapon – see Weapons (throwing) – displacing, 35. Thrusting weapons – see Weapons (thrusting) – extension of, 222. Thrusts, 219, 316, 409. – substitution of, 222, 411. Time: – touches off the, 221, 223, 411. – broken, 11, 237/1c, 422/1c. Validity of touches – see Touches (validity) – expiration of, 46f., 49, 63, 226, 321, 414. Vest (metallic), 19, 21, 216, 702b, 722, 743f., 752ff. Time hit, 12b. Vindictive actions – see Actions (vindictive) Timekeeper, 45f., 59, 204, 305, 508b. Violence, 28, 605, 641/2nd grp. Timetable, 511f., 580, 591, 604. Voltage, 716, 729. Touch – deciding, 226, 320f., 414, 423h. Warning: – penalty – see CARD (RED) – before penalty, 615, 635ff. Touches: – time, 46. – acknowledgment of, 66, 72, 606, 641/4th grp. – see also CARD (YELLOW). – annulment of, 30, 38ff, 42, 46, 73, 223, 230ff, Weapons: 237, 324ff, 422, 615, 623, 625, 635, 641. – dimensions, 24ff, 206ff, 307ff, 404ff. – awarding, 21, 30f., 40, 48f., 224, 226, 321, 412, – electrical, 712, 718ff, 731ff. 414. – components, 23. – correctness of, 29. – good state on the strip, 21, 604, 641. – direct, 11ff, 233ff, 417ff. – mounting, 712. – double, 38, 237, 329ff, 422. – specifications, 22ff, 205ff, 306ff, 404ff. – doubtful, 69, 74, 231/5, 327j, 331, 422/3. – tests, 18, 71, 231, 327. – immediate, 35, 38, 42, 237, 422. – throwing, 25, 30. – initiated, 32, 38f., 46, 47. – thrusting, 219, 316, 409. – judging of, 53ff, 61ff, 71ff, 227ff, 237ff, 322ff, – weight, 205, 306, 405. 415ff, 422ff. Weight: – materiality, 62, 64, 67ff, 72ff, 228ff, 323ff, 415. – control, 18, 71, 211, 311, 719, 732. – method of making, 28ff, 219, 316, 409, 605. – of weapons – see Weapons (weight) – not valid, 230ff, 324ff, 411. Withdrawal: – number of, 45, 225, 319, 413, 549, 555, 555A, – competitor or team, 52, 525ff, 546, 554A, 555A, 583. 562, 563. – on foil of opponent, 709/1, 743/3, 753. – obligatory, 562. – on ground, 54, 74, 201, 230, 304, 325, 331. – team or member of team, 525ff, 562. – other than on opponent, 230, 324f., 331, 641/1st World Cadet Championships, 505. & 2nd grps. World Championships, 505, 570ff, PC I. – priority between, 70, 75, 229, 232ff, 329ff, 416ff, World Congress on Drugs, 608. 713, 724. – priority with electrical apparatus – see Apparatus World Junior Championships - 505, 585ff, PC I. (electrical - priority of touches) Wound – see Injury – refusal to award, 30, 32, 38ff, 42, 46, 73, 230f., YELLOW CARD – see CARD (YELLOW) 237, 324ff, 331, 422, 615, 623, 625, 635ff. Yellow lights – see Lights (yellow) – registration of, 228f., 323ff, 709, 713f., 724ff. – seeking or offering, 607, 641/4th grp. – validity, 70, 75, 232ff, 329ff, 416ff, 713, 714. – with point, 219, 316, 409. Tournament, 8, 501, 502. Track suit, PC IIIA/b2, IIIC/c1. Trademarks (manufacturer/seller), PC IIIA, IVB. Trainers, 611, 641/4th grp Travel (of point) – see Point (travel) Turning, 28, 35, 641/1st grp. Ultimate appeal – see Appeal (ultimate)
Rules for Competitions – USFA 1995 – 101